XtraedgeFebruary 2012

Volume - 7 Issue - 8 Worry is a misuse of imagination.
February, 2012 (Monthly Magazine)

Editorial / Mailing Office :
112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.)
Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000
e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com
Editor :
Editorial
Dear Students,
Pramod Maheshwari
[B.Tech. IIT-Delhi]
All of us live and work within fixed patterns. These patterns and habits
Cover Design determine the quality of our life and the choices we make in life. There
are a few vital things to know about ourselves. We should become
Govind Saini
aware of how much we influence others, how productive we are and
Layout what can help us to achieve our goals. It is important to create an
Rajaram Gocher environment which will promote our success. We should consciously
create a system that would enable us to achieve our goals. Most of us
Circulation & Advertisement live in systems which have come our way by an accident, circumstances
or people we have met over a period of time. We are surrounded by our
Praveen Chandna
colleagues or subordinates who happened to be there by the fact of
Ph 0744-3040000, 9672977502
sheer recruitment earlier or later by the management. Our daily routines
Subscription and schedules have been formed on the basis of convenience,
coincidence, and the expectations of society and sometimes due to
Himanshu Shukla Ph. 0744-3040000 superstitions. The trick for success is to have an environment that helps
© Strictly reserved with the publishers in attaining our goals. Control your life. Make an effort to launch your
day with a great start. A law of physics says that an object set in motion
• No Portion of the magazine can be tends to remain in motion. It is the same thing with daily routine. To
published/ reproduced without the have a good start each morning will keep you upbeat during the day. If
written permission of the publisher you begin the day stressed, you will tend to remain so that way. The
• All disputes are subject to the
best is to create a course of action or conditions where you are not
exclusive jurisdiction of the Kota hassled for being late for a meeting, worried about household affairs or
Courts only. distracted by happenings in the world.
Aim to be highly successful. Control the direction of your life. Not only
Every effort has been made to avoid errors or should you start the day on a cheerful note but also continue to do so
omission in this publication. Inr spite of this, during the day. Keep yourself stimulated and invigorated during the
errors are possible. Any mistake, error or entire day. Start your day with a purpose. Have a daily direction and
discrepancy noted may be brought to our
trajectory of action. It will keep you on your course all day long.
notice which shall be taken care of in the
forthcoming edition, hence any suggestion is Throughout the day reinforce your positive values and your choices.
welcome. It is notified that neither the Anything that helps you in maintaining your highest values and your
publisher nor the author or seller will be most important priorities should be welcome. Be in control of your life
responsible for any damage or loss of action to and work. Create and sustain a wonderful environment filled with
any one, of any kind, in any manner, there from. beauty, peace, inspiration and hope.
Plan your day in such a way that suits your plans objectives and makes
Unit Price ` 20/- you feel just right with the right amount of encouragement during the
Special Subscription Rates entire day. You should give a direction to your day and timing.
6 issues : ` 100 /- [One issue free ] Presenting forever positive ideas to your success.
12 issues : ` 200 /- [Two issues free]
24 issues : ` 400 /- [Four issues free]
Yours truly
Owned & Published by Pramod
Maheshwari, 112, Shakti Nagar,
Dadabari, Kota & Printed by Naval
Maheshwari, Published & Printed at 112,
Pramod Maheshwari,
Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.
B.Tech., IIT Delhi
Editor : Pramod Maheshwari
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 FEBRUARY 2012

Volume-7 Issue-8
February, 2012 (Monthly Magazine) CONTENTS
INDEX PAGE
NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS
Much more IIT-JEE News.

Regulars ..........
Know IIT-JEE With 15 Best Questions of IIT-JEE NEWS ARTICLE 3
• 25% increase in number of girls from Bombay
Challenging Problems in Physics,, Chemistry & Maths
zone for IIT-JEE
Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy for IIT-JEE. • IIT placements : Companies Back on hiring
track
IIT-JEE Mock Test Paper with Solution
AIEEE & BIT-SAT Mock Test Paper with Solution IITian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 5
Dr. Amitabha Ghosh
KNOW IIT-JEE 6
Previous IIT-JEE Question
Study Time........
DYNAMIC PHYSICS 14
S
8-Challenging Problems [Set # 10]
Students’ Forum
Success Tips for the Months Physics Fundamentals
• If one asks for success and prepares for Matter Waves, Photo-electric Effect
Thermal Expansion, Thermodynamics
failure, he will get the situation he has
prepared for.
CATALYSE CHEMISTRY 29
• Loser's visualize the penalties of failure.
Key Concept
Winner's visualize the rewards of success. Carbonyl Compound
Co-ordination Compound &
• Treat others as if they were what they
Metallurgy
ought to be and you help them to become Understanding : Physical Chemistry
what they are capable of being.
DICEY MATHS 36
• You never achieve real success unless you
Mathematical Challenges
like what you are doing
Students’ Forum
• The first step toward success is taken when Key Concept
you refuse to be a captive of the Integration
environment in which you first find Trigonometrical Equation
yourself.
Test Time ..........
• Believe in yourself ! Have faith in your
abilities ! without a humble but reasonable XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 47
confidence in your own powers you can not Class XII – IIT-JEE 2012 Paper
be successful or happy. Class XI – IIT-JEE 2013 Paper
Mock Test-3 (CBSE Board Pattern) [Class # XII] 68
Solution of Mock Test-2 & 3 (CBSE Pattern)

25% increase in number of girls Akash 2 tablet to be launched by IIT Techfest 2012 : All about
from Bombay zone for IIT-JEE April 2012: Govt. Robotics
There are far more girls set to appear The government has expressed One of the highlights of the Techfest
for the Indian Institute of Technology confidence it will be successful in 2012, which held at IIT Bombay,
Joint Entrance Exam (IIT-JEE) in the bringing out the improved version of was its international exhibitions
Bombay zone in April 2012 than the Aakash tablet by April this year. arena. Evidently dominated by
before. The number of applications by The Aakash 2 is likely to have several robots, the robotic section had
girls has increased by nearly 25% improved specifications such as covered several aspects - humanoid,
compared to last year. The Bombay elongated battery life and faster surveillance, educational and
zone includes Maharashtra, Goa, processor. The government has been industrial. The robotic platform at the
This year, girls account for nearly striving hard to make its Aakash project Techfest 2012 showcased bots
27% of the total candidates applying, successful. The device, which is also expressing emotions, playing
with around 20,300 girls from among touted as the world's cheapest tablet, intelligent games and serving as a
76,600 candidates. The IITs have been faced harsh criticism from several model for military training, among
constantly trying to address the quarters for its poor quality and dismal others. With a great potential for
skewed male-female ratio at the IITs. features. applications in future in varying
“This is a significant increase,” said IIT Rajasthan, which developed the fields, lets look at these robots one
AV Mahajan, chairperson for JEE prototype of the device along with Data by one.
2012, Bombay zone. “One reason for Wind, found a series of faults in the Enjoy Moneycontrol.com on iPad
this could be that it was free for girls device, prompting the government to and be prepared for a fantastic
to apply online this year as well as reconsider extension of the LC to the experience. Get real time stock
cheaper to apply offline as compared Canadian company. Under pressure to quotes, interactive charts, market
to male applicants.” provide better endowed low-cost buzz, and watch CNBC-TV18,
device, the government has now its CNBC Awaaz live on your iPad.
Two IT-BHU students to start
turned attention to the Aakash 2, which Check out the free moneycontrol app
entrepreneurship club for school is likely to come at the same price tag
students of the original Aakash. IIT-KGP celebrates the 9th
VARANASI: When they cracked IIT- HRD Minister Kapil Sibal has said that annual Alumni Meet 2012 while
JEE two years ago, getting attractive the government will be looking for its alumni commits to give back
jobs in top IT companies was their more manufacturers to manufacture the
dream. Now, they want to promote to their Alma meter
Aakash 2 tablets, attributing
entrepreneurial skills in young school the massive demand for the move. IIT Kharagpur celebrated its 9th
children (Class X onwards) by “We want to make sure that the Annual Alumni Meet. While it
establishing entrepreneurship club for upgraded product caters to the need of honoured its alumni with the
schools. the customers... We have involved ITI Distinguished Service Award more
Bhanu Swami and Varun Agrawal, B in order to upgrade it... We will be able alumni committed towards the cause
Tech (III) students of electrical to bring in Aakash-II by April," Kapil of contributing to their Alma mater.
engineering of Institute of Sibal said. A galaxy of alumni from world wide
Technology, Banaras Hindu graced the 3-day dynamic event
Last week media reports
University (IT-BHU), are on their way had hinted that the government might Auto Expo 2012 : Hydrogen-
to launch country's first entrepre- shelve its Aakash project in view of the powered 3-wheeler at expo
neurship club targeting students (Class harsh criticism from most quarters. The NEW DELHI: The world's first
X onwards). The initiative not only reports were triggered by DataWind's hydrogen-powered three-wheeler,
aims at tapping and promoting opposition to certain test criteria 'HyAlfa', was showcased at theAuto
entrepreneurial skills in young suggested by the IIT. Read our previous Expo on Monday. Part of a
students, but also promises to turn coverage development project dubbed 'DelHy
these students into entrepreneurs. This 3w', a fleet of 15 HyAlfa three-
way they would become job providers wheelers will run on an experimental
rather than job seekers. basis at Pragati Maidan, where a

hydrogen refuelling station has also (by means of fuel cells etc.) and
been set up. Hydrogen generation (by means of
India Trade Organisation Promotion hydrocarbon cracking or
( ITPO) will use the vehicles on an electrolyzing/splitting water) become
experimental basis. The HyAlfa has viable for mass production and
been developed under a joint project consumption. In the short term, we can
by the United Nations Industrial and must focus immediately on
Development Organisation ( UNIDO) "Hydrogen supplementation". By this I "We are very grateful to have Subra
International Centre for Hydrogen mean - Hydrogen CNG (or HCNG in taking this new task," said President
Energy Technologies ( ICHET), short). New Delhi moved to CNG Barack Obama at the White House
Mahindra & Mahindra and IIT-Delhi, public transport a while back. In the Science after Suresh was sworn in as
with support from the Ministry of short term, this did bring down the the 13th NSF director by John
New and Renewable Energy. "The pollution levels and particulate matter Holdren, Obama's science advisor.
aim of this project is to convert in the atmosphere. After prolonged use,
we are now becoming aware of other "He has been at MIT (Massachusetts
vehicles so that they can carry and use Institute of Technology) and has
hydrogen - a carbon-free fuel - and problems such as NOX emissions due
to unclean or inefficient burning of been leading one of the top
thus remove all pollutants," Mahindra engineering programmes in the
& Mahindra president (automotive) CNG. NOX is highly carcinogenic and
now the levels of NOX in New Delhi country, and for him now to be able
Pawan Goenka said. He said the to apply that to the National Science
vehicle is not yet ready for are far exceeding permissible limits of
WHO. One way to solve this problem is Foundation is just going to be
commercial production and further outstanding," he said. "So we're very
fine-tuning will be required before to supplement CNG with Hydrogen. A
blended product called Hythane (trade grateful for your service."
moving in that direction. "Moreover,
we also have to look at commercial name for HCNG) is already under Suresh, 54, was confirmed by the US
viability of running a hydrogen- experimentation by Indian Oil. In Senate for a six-year term.
powered three-wheeler as the cost of conclusion, while Hydrogen powered
He has served as dean of the
hydrogen will be around Rs 250 per kg, vehicles are all a step in the right engineering school and as Vannevar
which is not affordable at all," he said. direction, the government should put Bush Professor of Engineering at
impetus on technologies that are more
This is a step in the right direction. MIT.
feasible in solving current big-city
Finally India Inc. with support from problems that Indian cities face. A mechanical engineer, who later
the likes of MNRE etc. is making became interested in materials
headway in vehicles driven by IITian tops CAT 2011 science and biology, Suresh has done
alternative energy sources. Jury is still CHENNAI: Ajinkya Deshmukh, an IIT pioneering work studying the
out on whether Hydrogen is the way - Madras graduate, decided to put in biomechanics of blood cells under
of the future. Judging by the progress 100% effort into preparing for the the influence of diseases such as
made in the USA and Germany on Common Admission Test this time, and malaria.
Hydrogen powered vehicles, we are got 100 percentile in return. He is one From 2000 to 2006, Suresh served as
not quite there yet. There are not only of nine MBA aspirants in the country to the head of the MIT Department of
supply chain challenges, but secure the top score this year. The IIMs Materials Science and Engineering.
Hydrogen continues to be a costly published the CAT 2011 scores on their He joined MIT in 1993 as the R.P.
proposition. You can either produce website on Wednesday. Simmons Professor of Materials
Hydrogen from hydrocarbon cracking Science and Engineering and held
On his success, Ajinkya, who wrote the
(which in turn has dependence on joint faculty appointments in the
test for the third time this year, said, "I
fossil fuels) or by splitting of water
always thought I haven't been making a departments of mechanical
through electrolysis. This itself engineering and biological
full effort while preparing or writing
requires around 5-6 kWh of engineering, as well as the division
the test. This time I was determined to
electricity. So unless the electricity
give my best. I told myself that I had to of health sciences and technology.
source is a renewable source such as
do it this year." Suresh holds a bachelor's degree
solar or wind, the electricity required
to split water itself is most likely to Indian American sworn in as from the Indian Institute of
come from thermal power plants, America's top science official Technology in Madras and a master's
thereby not giving any benefit. degree from Iowa State University.
IIT Madras alumnus, Subra Suresh, has
However, as everyone knows, human been sworn in as the director of Suresh was nominated by President
ingenuity knows no bounds and America's National Science Foundation Obama to become the new NSF
technologies only develop (NSF), the top US science body with a director in place of Arden L. Bement
incrementally. I firmly believe that we $7.4 billion budget to support scientific Jr, who led the agency from 2004
are one step away from a miracle institutions. until he resigned in May this yea
where both Hydrogen consumption

Success Story
This article contains stories/interviews of persons who succeed after graduation from different IITs
How India can we develop science and technology

Dr. Amitabha Ghosh sector :
• Post graduation in applied It should be treated as a business. There should be more

geology from IIT Kharagpur, private participation. We must have an external review to
evaluate the system and make changes as science and
• Working at NASA technology can take the country forward.
We must check brain drain. About 80,000 students migrate
Dr Amitabha Ghosh was the only Asian on NASA's to the US for further studies, and settle there. They find the
Mars Pathfinder mission. At present, he is a member of the facilities much better abroad. We need to reverse brain
Mars Odyssey Mission and the Mars Exploration Rover drain by enhancing and upgrading institutes in India.
Mission.
The state of space research in India :
During the Mars Pathfinder Mission, he conducted
I don't want to make controversial statements. All I can say
chemical analysis of rocks and soil on the landing site. The
is India is not at the frontier of space research. We have
simple and unassuming 34-year-old planetary geologist
made commendable progress but there is a long way to go.
has won several accolades, which include the NASA Mars
We can do much better. I would be glad to be of help in
Pathfinder Achievement Award in 1997 and the NASA
any way. Investment in research is investment in
Mars Exploration Rover Achievement Award in 2004.
imagination. It is a matter of national pride and internal
The journey from India to NASA. recognition. We need to allocate more funds to enhance
It has been an intriguing experience. I was keen on research and development work.
geologic research data interpretation and solar system We need good educational institutes like IITs and IIMs, but
formation. During my geological research days in India, I IITians don't rule the world. You must remember that Microsoft
had slept in railway stations while traveling to various co-founder (Bill Gates does not have a college degree.
places.
Youngsters must look around for role models and see what
After my post graduation in applied geology from IIT it is that they are doing right. Individuals must make use of
Kharagpur, I wrote a letter to a professor at NASA their inherent strengths to succeed.
expressing a desire to work at the space agency.
How can India become a leading global player :
I made certain suggestions; in fact, it was a critical letter.
Globalisation will reap huge and long-term benefits and
In India, you can never imagine criticising your professor.
India must make the best use of the opportunities. At the
My suggestions were approved, while I got an opportunity PBD seminar, I found people presenting grandiose plans.
to work at NASA. Instead, we should look at the realities and immediate
I think one requires luck and to put in sincere effort to solutions.
achieve one's goals. Being in the right place at the right The private sector has to be actively involved in the
time is also important. development of the country and the government has to
In Mumbai for the Pravasi Bharatiya Divas, he spoke respond to the needs of the people. Fifteen years ago, we
about his work at NASA and his vision for India. didn't have an Infosys, today we have many global
companies.
The Vision for India :
There should be drastic reduction in paper work. We need
I feel there India has a great future. We have world-class a scenario where one can start any business in a day, like
companies. Today, companies like Infosys can be in the US.
compared with world leaders like Oracle. Like the
Information Technology revolution, we can have a science Can India have something like NASA:
or space revolution. We have the potential to bring about The answer is: Yes, India can. All it requires is the right
revolutions in other sectors as well. kind of investment, infrastructure, people and support from
the government.

KNOW IIT-JEE
By Previous Exam Questions
∴ The rate of charge of momentum of the

PHYSICS system in the backward direction
1. A large open top container of negligible mass and Axρ × a
uniform cross-sectional area A has a small holes of By conservation of linear momentum
cross-sectional area A/100 in its side wall near the
2gxAρ
bottom. The container is kept on a smooth horizontal Axp × a =
floor and contains a liquid of density ρ and mass m0. 100
Assuming that the liquid starts flowing out g
horizontally through the hole at t = 0, Calculate ⇒ a=
50
[IIT-1997]
(i) the acceleration of the container, and (ii) By toricell's theorem v' = 2g × (0.25h ) where
(ii) its velocity when 75% of the liquid has drained h is the initial height of the liquid in the container
out. m0 is the initial mass
Sol. (i) Let at any instant of time during the flow, the m0
∴ m0 = Ah × ρ ⇒ h =
height of liquid in the container is x. The velocity Aρ
of flow of liquid through small hole in the orifice
by Toricelli's theorem is m0 gm 0
∴ v' = 2g × 0.25 × =
Aρ 2Aρ
v= 2gx ...(i)
2. Two parallel plate capacitors A and B have the same
The mass of liquid flowing per second through the
separation d = 8.85 × 10–4 m between the plates. The
orifice
plate area of A and B are 0.04 m2 and 0.02 m2
= ρ × volume of liquid flowing per second respectively. A slab of dielectric constant (relative
dm A permittivity) K = 9 has dimensions such that it can
=ρ× 2gx × ...(iii) exactly fill the space between the plates of capacitor
dt 100 B. [IIT-1993]
Therefore the rate of charge of momentum of the
system in forward direction
A B A B
dm 2gx × A × ρ
= ×v= (From (i) and (ii))
dt 100
The rate of charge of momentum of the system in
110 V
the backward direction
(a) (b) (c)
= Force on backward direction = m × a where m is
mass of liquid in the container at the instant t
(i) The dielectric slab is placed inside A as shown
m = Vol. × density in figure (a). A is then charged to a potential
=A×x×ρ difference of 110 V. Calculate the capacitance
of A and the energy stored in it.
(ii) The battery is disconnected and then the
dielectric slab is moved from A. Find the work
done by the external agency in removing the
ρ slab from A.
x (iii)The same dielectric slab is now placed inside
B, filling it completely. The two capacitors A
and B are then connected as shown in figure
v (c). Calculate the energy stored in the system.

Sol. (i) The capacitor A with dielectric slab can be q1 q
considered as two capacitors in parallel, one ∴ = 2
CA CB
having dielectric slab and one not having dielectric
slab each capacitor has an area of
A
. The CA 0.4 × 10 –9
⇒ q1 = . q2 = . q2 = 0.22 q2
2 CB 1.8 × 10 – 9
combined capacitance is
∴ 0.22 q2 + q2 = 2.2 × 10–7
+
110 V 2.2
+ + + + ⇒ q2 = × 10–7 = 1.8 × 10–7 C
– 1.22
– – +
A A/2 A/2 ⇒ q1 = 0.4 × 10–7 C
– Total energy stored
C = C1 + C2
q12 q2
(A / 2)ε 0 (A / 2)ε 0 εr A ε0 = + 2
= + = [1 + εr] 2C A 2C B
d d 2 d
0.4 × 0.4 × 10 –14 1.8 × 1.8 × 10 –14
0.4 × 8.85 × 10 –12 = +
= [1 + 9] = 2 × 10–9 F 2 × 0.4 × 10 – 9 2 × 1.8 × 10 –8
2 × 8.85 × 10 – 4
= 0.2 × 10–5 + 0.9 × 10–5 = 1.1 × 10–5 J.
∴ Energy stored
1 1 3. A particles of mass m = 1.6 × 10–27 kg and charge q =
= CV2 = × 2 × 10–9 × (110)2 = 1.21 × 10–5 J
2 2 1.6 × 10–19 C enters a region of uniform magnetic
(ii) Work done in removing the dielectric state = field of strength 1 Tesla along the direction shown in
(Energy stored in capacitor without dielectric) – figure. The speed of the particle is 107 m/s. (i) the
(Energy stored in capacitor with dielectric). magnetic field is directed along the inward normal to
the plane of the paper. The particle leaves the region
It may be noted that while taking out the dielectric
of the field at the point F. Find the distance EF and
the charge on the capacitor plate remains the same.
the angle θ. (ii) If the direction of the field is along
q2 q2 the outward normal to the plane of the paper, find the
∴ W= – time spent by the particle in the region of the
2C' 2C
magnetic field after entering it at E. [IIT-1984]
Here, C = 2 × 10–9 F,
θ ×× ×× ×
×
×
×
×
×
Aε 0 0.04 × 8.85 × 10 –14 × × × × ×
C' = = = 0.4 × 10–9 F F × × × × ×
d 8.85 × 10 – 4 × × × × ×
–9 –7 E ×× ×× × × ×
q = CV = 2 × 10 × 110 = 2.2 × 10 C × × ×
× × × × ×
(2.2 × 10 –7 ) 2  1 1  45º × × × × ×
∴ W=  –9
–  Sol. (a) m = 1.6 × 10–27 kg, q = 1.6 × 10–19 C
2  0.4 × 10 2 × 10 – 9 
B = 1 T, v = 107 m/s
–14
2.2 × 2.2 × 10  2 – 0.4 
= –9  2 × 0.4  F = q . v B sin α
2 × 10  
(acting towards O by Fleming's left hand rule)
1.6
= 1.21 × × 10–5 = 4.84 × 10–5 J F = qvB [Q α = 90º]
0.4
But F = ma
ε ε A
(iii) The capacitance of B = 0 r B ∴ qvB = ma
d
qvB
∴ a=
8.85 × 10 –12 × 9 × 0.02 m
=
8.85 × 10 – 4
1.6 × 10 –19 × 10 7 × 1
CB = 1.8 × 10 F –9 =
1.6 × 10 – 27
The charge on A, qA = 2.2 × 10–7 C gets distributed
= 1015 m/s2
into two parts.
∴ q1 + q2 = 2.2 × 10–7 C Also the potential
difference across A = p.d. across B

⇒ B = µ0 n i0 sin ωt [Q i = i0 sin ωt given]
θ × × × × × × × The magnetic flux linked with the solenoid
F × × × × × × ×
→ →
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
φ = B . A = BA cos 90º
O × × × × × × × = (µ0 n i0 sin ωt) (πa2)
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ∴ The rate of change of magnetic flux through the
V × × × × × × ×
V2 = solenoid
2 E × × 45º × × × ×
45º × × × × × × × dφ
V2 =
V = π µ0 n a2 i0 ω cos ωt
2 dt
The same rate of change of flux is linked with the
This is the centripetal acceleration cylindrical shell. By the principle of electromagetic
v2 induction, the induced emf produced in the
∴ = 1015 ∠OEF = 45º cylinderical shell is
r
(Q OE, act as a radius)
14
10
⇒ r= = 0.1 m By symmetry
1015
I
∠OFE = 45º
TOP VIEW
∴ ∠EOF = 90º (by Geometry)
dφ
If the magnetic field is in the outward direction e=– = – πµ0 n a2 i0 ω cos ωt ...(i)
and the particle enters in the same way at E, then dt
according to Fleming's Left hand rule, the particle The resistance offered by the cylindrical shell to the
will turn towards clockwise direction and cover flow of induced current I will be
3/4th of a circle as shown in the figure. l
45º R=ρ
× × × × × × × A
E × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
Here, l = 2πR,
× × × × × × × A=L×d
× × O × × × ×
× × × × × × × 2πR
× × × × × × × ∴ R=ρ ...(ii)
45º× ×
× × × × ×
Ld
45º
× × × × × × × The induced current I will be
F× × × × × × ×
|e| [πµ 0 na 2i 0 ω cos ωt ] × Ld
3  2πr  I= =
∴ Time required = × = 4.71 × 10–8 sec. R ρ × 2πR
4  v 
πµ 0 na 2 i 0 ω cos ωt × Ld
4. A long solenoid of radius 'a' and number of turns I= Ans.
2ρR
per unit length n is enclosed by cylindrical shell of
radius R, thickness d(d<<R) and length L. A
variable current i = i0 sin ωt flows through the coil. 5. A particle of charge equal to that of an electron, –e,
If the resitivity of the material of cylindrical shell is and mass 208 times the mass of the electron (called a
ρ, find the induced current in the shell. [IIT-2005] nu-meson) moves in a circular orbit around a nucleus
Sol. The magnetic field in the solenoid is given by of charge + 3e. (Take the mass of the nucleus to be
B = µ0ni infinite). Assuming that the bohr model of the atom is
applicable to this system.
a R
d (i) Derive an expression for the radius of the nth
Bohr orbit.
(ii) Find the value of n for which the radius of the
orbit is approximately the same as that of the first
L Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom.
(iii) Find the wavelength of the radiation emitted
when the mu-meson jumps from the third orbit of
the first orbit. [IIT-1988]

Sol. (i) Let m be the mass of electron. Then the mass
of mu-meson is 208 m. According to Bohr's CHEMISTRY
postualte, the angular momentum of mu-meson
should be an integral multiple of h/2π. 6. An organic compound CxH2yOy was burnt with
e twice the amount of oxygen needed for complete
r combustion to CO2 and H2O. The hot gases, when
cooled to 0 ºC and 1 atm pressure, measured 2.24
+3e
L. The water collected during cooling weighed 0.9
g. The vapour pressure of pure water at 20 ºC is
17.5 mm Hg and is lowered by 0.104 mm Hg when
nh
∴ (208 m) vr = 50 g of the organic compound is dissolved in 1000
2π g of water. Give the molecular formula of the
nh nh organic compound. [IIT-1983]
∴ v= =
2π × 208mr 416πmr Sol. The combustion reaction is
…(1) CxH2yOy + x O2 → x CO2 + y H2O
Since mu-meson is moving in a circular path To start with, the amount of O2 taken is 2x. Hence,
therefore it needs centripetal force which is after the combustion reaction, we will be left with
provided by the electrostatic force between the the following amounts.
nucleus and mu-meson. Amount of oxygen left unreacted = x
Amount of carbon dioxide = x
(208m) v 2 1 3e × e
∴ = × Amount of water = y
r 4πε 0 r2 When this mixture is cooled to 0 ºC and 1 atm, we
3e 2 will be left with oxygen and carbon dioxide. Hence,
∴ r= the amount 2x occupies the given volume of 2.24 L
4πε 0 × 208mv 2 at STP. Hence,
Substituting the value of v from (1) we get (2.24 / 2)L
3e 2 × 416πmr × 416πmr Amount x = = 0.05 mol
r= 22.4Lmol−1
4πε 0 × 208n 2 h 2 Now, Mass of water collected = 0.9 g
Amount of water collected,
n 2 h 2ε 0
⇒ r= 0.9g
624πme 2 y= = 0.05 mol
…(2) 18g mol −1
(ii) The radius of the first orbit of the hydrogen Thus, the empirical formula of the compound is
atom C0.05H2 × 0.05 O0.05, i.e. CH2O.
Now, according to Raoult's law
ε h2
= 0 2 ∆p
πme – = x2
…(3) p*
To find the value of n for which the radius of 0.104 mmHg
i.e. =
the orbit is approximately the same as that of 17.5 mmHg
the first Bohr orbit for hydrogen atom, we
equate (50g / M )
equation (2) and (3) (50g / M) + (1000g / 18g mol −1 )
n 2h 2ε0 ε h2 Solving for M, we get M = 150.5 g mol–1
2
= 0 2 ⇒ n = 624 ≈ 25 Number of repeating units of CH2O in the
624πme πme
150.5
molecular formula = ≈5
1 12 + 2 + 16
1 1 
(iii) = 208 R × z2  2 – 2 Hence, Molecular formula of the compound is
λ  n1 n2  C5H10O5.
1 1 1 7. The oxides of sodium and potassium contained in a

⇒ = 208 × 1.097 × 107 × 32  2 – 2 
λ 1 3  0.5 g sample of feldspar were converted to the
respective chlorides. The weight of the chlorides
⇒ λ = 5.478 × 10–11 m thus obtained was 0.1180 g. Subsequent treatment
of the chlorides with silver nitrate gave 0.2451 g of
silver chloride. What is the percentage of Na2O and
K2O in the mixture ? [IIT-1979]

Sol. Mass of sample of feldspar containing Na2O and 8. 5 ml of 8 N of nitric acid, 4.8 ml of 5 N
K2O = 0.5 g. hydrochloric acid and a certain volume of 17 M
According to the question, sulphuric acid are mixed together and made upto 2
litre. 30 ml of this mixture exactly neutralizes 42.9
Na2O + 2HCl → 2NaCl + H2O ..(1)
ml of sodium carbonate solution containing one
2 × 23 + 16 = 62g 2(23 + 35.5) = 117 g gram of Na2CO3.10H2O in 100 ml of water.
K2O + 2HCl → 2KCl + H2O ...(2) Calculate the amount in grams of the sulphate ions
2 × 39 + 16 = 94g 2(39 + 35.5) = 149 g in solution. [IIT-1985]
Mass of chlorides = 0.1180 g Sol. Given that,
Let, Mass of NaCl = x g N HNO3 = 8 N
∴ Mass of KCl = (0.1180 – x)g VHNO3 = 5 ml
Again, on reaction with silver nitrate,
NHCl = 5 N
NaCl + AgNO3 → AgCl + NaNO3 ...(3) VHCl = 4.8 ml
23 + 35.5 = 58.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g M H 2SO 4 = 17 M
KCl + AgNO3 → AgCl + KNO3 ...(4)
Step 1. Meq. of HNO3 in 2L solution
39 + 35.5 = 74.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g
= N HNO3 × VHNO3
Total mass of AgCl obtained = 0.2451 g
Step 1. From eq. (3) = 8 × 5 = 40
58.5 g of NaCl yields = 143.5 g AgCl ∴ Meq. of HNO3 in 30 ml solution
143.5 40
∴ x g of NaCl yields = x g AgCl = × 30 = 0.6
58.5 2000
And from eq. (4), Step 2. Meq. of HCl in 2L solution
74.5 g of KCl yields = 143.5 g of AgCl = NHCl × VHCl
∴ (0.1180 – x)g of KCl yields = 5 × 4.8 = 24
143.5 ∴ Meq. of HCl in 30 ml solution
= (0.1180 – x)g AgCl 24
74.5 = × 30 = 0.36
Total mass of AgCl 2000
Step 3. Meq. of H2SO4 in 2L solution
143.5 143.5
x+ (0.1180 – x) = 0.2451 = Valency factor × M H 2SO 4 × VH 2SO 4
58.5 74.5
which gives, x = 0.0342 = 2 × 17 × VH 2SO 4
Hence, Mass of NaCl = x = 0.0342 g ∴ Meq. of H2SO4 in 30 ml solution
And Mass of KCl = 0.1180 – 0.0342 = 0.0838g 34 × VH 2SO 4 × 30
Step 2. From eq.(1), = = 0.51 VH 2SO 4
2000
117 g of NaCl is obtained from = 62 g Na2O
Step 4. Also given that,
∴ 0.0342 g NaCl is obtained from Volume of Na2CO3.10H2O = 100 ml
62 Mass of Na2CO3.10H2O = 1 g
= × 0.032 = 0.018 g Na2O
117 Equivalent mass of Na2CO3.10H2O
From eq. (2), Molecular mass 286
= = = 143 g equiv–1
149 g of KCl is obtained from = 94 g K2O 2 2
∴ 0.0838 g of KCl is obtained from We know,
94 Normality
= × 0.0838 = 0.053 g K2O
149 Mass of solute × 1000
=
0.018 Equivalent mass of solute × Volume (ml)
Step 3. % of Na2O in feldspar = × 100
0.5 1× 1000
= = 0.070 N
= 3.6% 143 × 100
0.053 Meq. of Na2CO3.10H2O
% of K2O in feldspar = × 100 = 10.6 % = N Na 2CO3 .10 H 2O × VNa 2CO3 .10 H 2O
0.5
= 0.070 × 42.9 = 3.003

Step 5. 1 gram equivalent acid neutralizes 1 gram precipitate, which dissolves in the excess of the
equivalent of base. respective reagent to produce a clear solution in
∴ 0.6 + 0.36 + 0.51 VH 2SO 4 = 3.003 each case. Identify (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E). Write
the equations of the reactions involved. [IIT-2001]
Solving , VH 2SO 4 = 4 ml Sol. (A) is ZnS,
Step 6. 1000 ml of 1 M H2SO4 contains ZnS + H2SO4 → ZnSO 4 + H 2S
(A) (C) ( B)
= 96 g SO42–ions
96 × 17 × 4 3H 2S + K2Cr2O7 + 4H2SO4 → K2SO4 + Cr2(SO4)3
∴ 4ml of 17 M H2SO4 contains = ( B)
1000
= 6.528g SO42– ions + 7H2O + 3S
White grey
( D)
9. The equilibrium constant Kp of the reaction
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g) is 900 atm–1 at S + O 2 → SO 2
(D) Air (E)
800 K. A mixture containing SO3 and O2 having
initial partial pressures of 1 atm and 2 atm, SO 2 + 2H 2S → 2H 2 O + 3S
(D)
respectively, is heated at constant volume to (E) ( B) Colourless liquid ( C )
equilibrate. Calculate the pressure of each gas at 5H2O + CuSO 4 → CuSO 4 .5H 2 O
800 K. [IIT- 1989] White Blue
Sol. Since to start with SO2 is not present, it is expected ZnSO4 + 2NaOH → Zn(OH)2 + Na2SO4
that some of SO3 will decompose to give SO2 and
O2 at equilibrium. If 2x is the partial pressure of Zn(OH)2 + 2NaOH → Na2ZnO2 (soluble) + 2H2O
SO3 that is decreased at equilibrium, we would Also in excess of NH4OH it forms soluble
have complex [Zn(NH3)4](OH)2.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)
t=0 0
teq 2x
2 atm
2 atm + x
1 atm
1 atm – 2x
MATHEMATICS
(p SO3 ) 2 (1 atm − 2 x ) 2 11. If f (x) is twice differentiable function such that
Hence, Kp = 2
= 2 f (a) = 0, f (b) = 2, f (c) = 1, f (d) = 2, f (e) = 0,
(p SO 2 ) (p O 2 ) (2x ) (2 atm + x )
where a < b < c < d < e, then the minimum number
= 900 atm–1 of zero's of g(x) = {f ' (x)}2 + f '' (x). f (x) in the
Assuming x << 2 atm, we get interval [a, e] is? [IIT-2006]
(1 atm − 2x ) 2 d
2
= 900 atm–1 Sol. Let, g(x) = [f (x) . f '(x)]
(2x ) (2 atm) dx
to get the zero of g(x) we take function
(1 atm − 2x ) 2
or = 1800 h(x) = f (x). f ' (x)
(2x ) 2
between any two roots of h(x) there lies at least
1 atm one root of h' (x) = 0
or – 1 = 42.43
2x ⇒ g(x) = 0 ⇒ h(x) = 0 ⇒ f (x) = 0 or f ' (x) = 0
1 If f (x) = 0 has 4 minimum solutions.
or x = atm = 0.0115 atm
2 × 43.43 f ' (x) = 0 has 3 minimum solutions.
Hence, p(SO2) = 2x = 0.023 atm; h(x) = 0 has 7 minimum solutions.
p(O2) = 2atm + x = 2.0115 atm and ⇒ h' (x) = g(x) = 0 has 6 minimum solutions
p(SO3) = 1 atm – 2x = 0.977 atm 12. The position vectors of the vertices A, B and C of a
10. A white substance (A) reacts with dil. H2SO4 to ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
tetrahedron ABCD are i + j + k , i and 3 i ,
produce a colourless gas (B) and a colourless
solution (C). The reaction between (B) and respectively. The altitude from vertex D to the
acidified K2Cr2O7 solution produces a green opposite face ABC meets the median line through
solution and a slightly coloured precipitate (D). The A of the triangle ABC at a point E. If the length of
substance (D) burns in air to produce a gas (E) the side AD is 4 and the volume of the tetrahedron
which reacts with (B) to yield (D) and a colourless
2 2
liquid. Anhydrous copper sulphate is turned blue on is , find the position vector of the point E for
addition of this colourless liquid. Addition of 3
aqueous NH3 or NaOH to (C) produces first a all its possible positions. [IIT-1996]

^ ^ ⇒ 3λ(λ + 2) + 2(λ + 2) = 0
i+ 3 i ^
Sol. F is mid-point of BC i.e., F ≡ = 2i ⇒ (3λ + 2) (λ + 2) = 0
2
⇒ λ = – 2/3, λ = – 2
and AE ⊥ DE (given)
Therefore, when λ = – 2/3, position vector of E is
A(i + j + k)
given by
D
 2λ + 1  ^ 1 ^ 1 ^
λ  i + j + k
E  λ + 1  λ + 1 λ +1
1 2.(–2 / 3) + 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^
= i + j + k
– 2 / 3 +1 – 2 / 3 +1 – 2 / 3 +1
B(i) F(2i)
C(3i) – 4 / 3 +1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^
= i + j + k
–2+3 – 2+3 – 2+3
Let E divides AF in λ : 1. The position vector of E 3 3 3
is given by –4 + 3
^ ^ ^ ^ = 3 ^i + 1 j^ + 1 k ^
2λ i + 1( i + j+ k )  2λ + 1  ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1/ 3 1/ 3 1/ 3
=  i + j + k
λ +1  λ +1  λ +1 λ +1
^ ^ ^
Now, volume of the tetrahedron = – i + 3 j + 3k
1 and when λ = – 2
= (area of the base) (height) Position vector of E is given by,
3
2 × (–2) + 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ – 4 +1 ^ ^ ^
2 2 1 i+ j+ k= i– j– k
⇒ = (area of the ∆ABC) (DE) – 2 +1 – 2 +1 – 2 +1 –1
3 3
^ ^ ^
1 → → = 3i – j – k
But area of the ∆ABC = | (BC× BA ) |
2 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
Therefore, – i + 3 j + 3k and + 3 i – j – k are
1 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
= | 2 i× ( j+ k ) | = | i× j+ i× k ) | the position vector of E.
2
^ ^ π/3 π + 4x3
= | k – j) | = 2 13. Evaluate ∫−π / 3  π
dx [IIT-2004]
2 2 1 2 − cos | x | + 
Therefore, = ( 2 ) (DE)  3
3 3
Sol. Let,
⇒ DE = 2
π/3 πdx π/3 x 3 dx
Since ∆ADE is a right angle triangle,
AD2 = AE2 + DE2
I= ∫−π / 3  π
+4 ∫
−π / 3  π
2 − cos | x | +  2 − cos | x | + 
 3  3
⇒ (4)2 = AE2 + (2)2
⇒ AE2 = 12 a  0, f (− x) = − f ( x)
→
But AE =
2λ + 1 ^
i +
1 ^
j +
1 ^ ^ ^ ^
k – (i + j + k )
Using ∫ −a
f ( x) dx= 
2 ∫
a
f ( x)dx, f (− x) = f ( x) 

 0 
λ +1 λ +1 λ +1
π/3 πdx
=
λ ^
λ +1
i –
λ ^
λ +1
j –
λ ^
λ +1
k
∴ I=2 ∫ 0  π
+0
2 − cos | x | + 
 3
→ 1 3λ2
⇒ | AE |2 = [λ2 + λ2 + λ2] =  
(λ + 1) 2
(λ + 1) 2  3 
 π/3 x dx 
Therefore, 12 =
3λ2 as

∫ −π / 3  π
is odd 

2 2 − cos | x | + 
(λ + 1)   3 
⇒ 4(λ + 1) = λ2 2
π/3 dx
⇒ 4λ2 + 4 + 8λ = λ2
I = 2π ∫ 0 2 − cos( x + π / 3)
⇒ 3λ2 + 8λ + 4 = 0 2π / 3 dt π
⇒ 3λ2 + 6λ + 2λ + 4 = 0 = 2π ∫ π/3 2 − cos t
, where x + = t
3

t 15. Show that the value of tanx/tan3x, wherever defined
2π / 3 sec 2 dt
never lies between 1/3 and 3. [IIT-1992]
= 2π ∫
π/3
2
1 + 3 tan 2
t tan x tan x
2 Sol. y = =
tan 3x 3 tan x – tan 3 x
= 2π ∫
3
1 / 3 1 + 3u 2
2du
=
4π
3
. { 3 tan −1
3u 1 / } 3
3
1 – 3 tan 2 x
tan x(1 – 3 tan 2 x)
4π 4π 1 =
= (tan–1 3 – tan–11) = tan–1   3 tan x – tan 3 x
3 3 2
1 – 3 tan 2 x
π/3 π + 4x3 4π 1 = [Q tan 3x ≠ 0 ⇒ 3x ≠ 0]
∴ ∫
−π / 3  π
dx =
3
tan–1   .
2
3 – tan 2 x
2 − cos | x | +  ⇒ x≠0
 3 
⇒ tan x ≠ 0
14. An unbiased die, with faces numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
0 ∞
6, is thrown n times and the list on n numbers
showing up is noted. What is the probability that + – +
among the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 only three
numbers appear in this list ? [IIT-2001] 1/3 3
Sol. Let us define at onto function F from A : [r1, r2 ...
rn] to B : [1, 2, 3] where r1r2 .... rn are the readings Let tan x = t
of n throws and 1, 2, 3 are the numbers that appear
1 – 3t 2
in the n throws. ⇒ y=
Number of such functions, 3– t2
M = N – [n(1) – n(2) + n(3)] ⇒ 3y – t2y = 1 – 3t2
where N = total number of functions and ⇒ 3y – 1 = t2y – 3t2
n(t) = number of function having exactly t elements ⇒ 3y – 1 = t2 (y – 3)
in the range.
3y –1
Now, N = 3n, n(1) = 3.2n, n(2) = 3, n(3) = 0 ⇒ = t2
y –3
⇒ M = 3n – 3.2n + 3
Hence the total number of favourable cases 3y –1
⇒ ≥ 0, t2 ≥ 0 ∀ t ∈ R
= (3n – 3.2n + 3). 6C3 y –3
(3 n − 3.2 n + 3) × 6 C3 ⇒ y ∈ (– ∞, 1/3) ∪ (3, ∞)
⇒ Required probability = n
6 Therefore, y is not defined in between (1/3, 3).
Physics Facts
Nuclear Physics
1. Alpha particles are the same as helium nuclei and have the symbol .
1. The atomic number is equal to the number of protons (2 for alpha)
2. Deuterium ( ) is an isotope of hydrogen ( )
3. The number of nucleons is equal to protons + neutrons (4 for alpha)
4. Only charged particles can be accelerated in a particle accelerator such as a cyclotron or Van Der Graaf
generator.
5. Natural radiation is alpha ( ), beta ( ) and gamma (high energy x-rays)
6. A loss of a beta particle results in an increase in atomic number.
7. All nuclei weigh less than their parts. This mass defect is converted into binding energy. (E=mc2)
8. Isotopes have different neutron numbers and atomic masses but the same number of protons (atomic
numbers).
9. Geiger counters, photographic plates, cloud and bubble chambers are all used to detect or observe radiation.

Physics Challenging Problems
Set # 10
This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in physics, that would be very helpful in facing IIT
JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and we
hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Dev Sharma
So lutions will b e p ub lished in nex t issue Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch
1. A particle of charge Q and of negligible initial speed (A) zero if both wires slide towards left
is accelerated through a potential difference of U. (B) zero if both wires slide in opposite direction
The particle reaches a region of uniform magnetic (C) 0.2mA if both wires move towards left
field of induction B, where it undergoes circular
(D) 0.2mA if both wires move in opposite direction
motion. If potential difference is doubled & B is also
doubled then magnetic moment of the circular 4. A circular current loop is shown in the adjacent
current due to circular motion of charge Q will figure. The magnetic field in the region is along x-
become axis and its magnitude in the space is increasing
(A) double (B) half with increasing y-coordinate. The net magnetic
(C) four times (D) remain same force on the loop is
2. Three long rod AA, AB, CC are moving with a y
speed v in a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular B
to the plane of paper as shown in figure. The
triangle formed between the three wires is always an
equilateral triangle. If resistance per unit length of x
wire is λ , then the induced current in the triangle is
A B (A) along + z-axis (B) along –z-axis
× × × × × × × (C) along +y-axis (D) None of these
B0
× × × × × v× ×
v
× × × × × × × 5. A point charge q moves from A to B along a
× × × × × × × parabolic path (AB is latus rectum). Electric field is
C × × × × C
× along x-axis. The work done by the field is
B B0 A
v y
B0 v 2B 0 v
(A) (B) A B
3λ 3λ 2
y = 4ax
B0 v B0 v
(C) (D)
3λ λ x
E
3. In the diagram shown, the wires P1Q1 and P2Q2 are
made to slide on the rails with same speed of 5m/s.
In this region a magnetic field of 1T exists. The (A) – qEa (B) –2qEa
electric current in 9Ω resistor is (C) +qeA (D) 2qEa
× × P1× × P2 × × × × →
6. In a cylindrical zone of radius R, magnetic field B is
× × × × × × × × × present perpendicular to the plane of the paper into it.
4cm × × ×
2Ω ×2Ω× × × × ×
9Ω
→
Magnitude of B is varying with time as B0(p + qt)
× × × × × × × × ×
where p & q are positive constant. Consider a static
× × × × × × × × × triangle loop OAM. Emf induced in the triangular loop
Q1 Q2

× ×
×
× × × ×
×
× × O× B ×
× × R
× ×
× 60º 60º ×
× × × × • After travelling 2.4 billion miles in just over 6
A M years to reach Jupiter, Galileo missed its target at
the Jovian moon Io by only 67 miles. That's like
2B 0 πqR 2 B 0 qR 2 shooting an arrow from Los Angeles at a
(A) (B)
3 3 bull's-eye in New York and missing by only 6
B 0 PR 2 PB 0 R 2 inches!
(C) (D)
3 2
• Utopia ia a large, smooth lying area of Mars.
7. Consider cylindrical region of the magnetic field
• The biggest star has a diameter of 1800 million
shown in the figure. Region I and II have fields
directed perpendicularly outward and inward miles, making it 2000 times bigger than the Sun.
respectively. Fields are varying with time as
• 15% of the world's fresh water flows doen the
Region I : B = 3B0t
Amazon.
Region II : B = B0t
There is no net induced electric field in the region • In 1995, each American used an annual average
2
r  of 731 pounds of paper, more than double the
outside the magnetic field then the ratio of  2  =
 r1  amount used in the 1980's. Contrary to
× × predictions that computers would displace paper,
× r2 × consumption is growing.
×
Region I ×
× ×
r1 Region II • The term 'black hole' was coined in 1968 when
× ×
× John Wheeler described how an in-falling object
× × × ××
'becomes dimmer millisecond by
millisecond...light and particles incident from
8. Match the column: outside...go down the black hole only to add to
Column – I Column – II its mass and increase its gravitational attraction.'
(A) In a series RLC (P) Z may increase
• The 'Red Planet' isn't really red at all, Nasa
circuit if C decreases
photographs indicate that it is more of a tan or
(B) In a series RLC (Q) Z may decrease
butterscotch colour.
circuit if L increases
(C) In a series RLC (R) resonance • The International Space Station orbits at 248
circuit if R decreases frequency increases miles above the Earth.
(D) In a series RLC (S) power factor
circuit if C increases decrease • The axis of orbit of the planet Uranus is tilted at a
90 degree angle.
• Astronomers have discovered over 10,000

asteroids - but put them together and they would
be smaller than the Moon.
• Have you ever seen a ring around the moon?

Folklore has it that this means bad weather is
coming.

8 Solution
Set # 9
Physics Challenging Problems

Qu e s tio ns we r e Pub lis he d in Januar y I ssu e
1. For the process A → B PV −3

3. TV-3 = k ⇒ V =k
1 3 1 nR
U ∝ ⇒ RT ∝
ρ 2 M for this polytrophic process, PV-2 = constant
V so x = -2
or T ∝ V nR (T2 − T1 ) nR (T2 − T1 ) 2
w= = = nRT0
So AB is isobaric process (pressure in constant) 1− x 3 3
8U 0  3  ∆U = nCV∆T = n 3/2 R(3T0 – T0) = 3nRT0
TA = As 4U 0 = RTA 
3R  2  2 
∆Q = ∆U = W =  + 3 nRT0 = nRT0
11
M  3  3
VA =
2ρ 0 ∆Q 11 nRT0 11
∆Q = nC∆T ⇒ C = = = R
16 U 0 ρ 0 M n∆T 3 n (2T0 ) 6
so PA = and VB =
3M 4ρ 0 Option [A,C,D] is correct
so WAB = P[VB - VA] y
16 U 0 ρ 0  M M  16 U 0 ρ 0 M
⇒  − =− ×
3M  4ρ 0 2ρ 0  3M 4ρ 0 F = mω2R
Option [D] is correct 4. R x Fy = F sin ωt
ωt
F Fy Fy = mω2R sin (ωt)
P0 Fx
2. The slope of the graph is m = −
2V0
The equation of this graph is given by x
* In figure as cos ωt = ⇒ x = R cos ωt
P V 3P R
P=− 0 + 0
2V0 2 * For one complete circle, θ = ωt
nRT −P0 V 3P0 y
⇒ = +
V 2V0 2
−P0 V 2 3P0 *
⇒T=− V + V
2nRV0 2nR R
ωt x vx = – ωR sin ωt
dT −2P0 V0 3P0
= + =0
dV 2nRV0 2nR vx
P0 V 2P0 3V0 v = ωR
⇒ = ⇒V=
nRV0 2nR 2 Option [A,C] is correct
3V0 5. From 1st law,
At V = , temp will be maximum [n = 1] ∆Q = ∆U + W
2
nCαT + nCvαT + pαV
P 9V 2 3P 3V
Tmax =− 0 × 0 + 0 × 0 ⇒ nCαT = nCVαT + nRT/V αV
2RV0 4 2R 2 nRT
9 P0 V0 9 P0 V0 ⇒ nαT0 e αV αV = C V αT0 e αV αV +
T0 e αV αV
⇒− + V
8 R 4 R ⇒ αC = αCV + R/V ⇒ C = CV + R/αV
9 P0 V0 Option [B] is correct
⇒
8 R 6. Option [C] is correct
Option [C] is correct 7. Option [B] is correct
8. Option [D] is correct

Students Forum
Expert’s Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
PHYSICS
1. AB and CD are two ideal springs having force constant (F1 + K1y1) + (F2 + K2y2) = F + mg ...(ii)
K1 and K2 respectively. Lower ends of these springs are Taking moments about B, (figure)
attached to the ground so that the springs remain F
vertical. A light rod or length 3a is attached with upper
ends B and C of springs. A particle of mass m is fixed C
B a 2a
with the rod at a distance a from end B and in
equilibrium, the rod is horizontal. Calculate period of
small vertical oscillations of the system. (F1 + K1y1) mg (F2 + K2y2)
m
B a C (F + mg) × a = (F2 + K2y2) × 3a ...(iii)
2a
Solving above equations,
2F F
K1y1 = and K2y2 = .
3 3
K1 K2 2F F
or y1 = and y2 =
3K1 3K 2
Since, distance of the particle from left spring is 'a'
and that from right spring is '2a', therefore,
A D downward displacement of the particle from
equilibrium position will be
Sol. Let, in equilibrium, compressive forces in left and
right springs be F1 and F2, respectively. 2 y1 y 4F F ( K 1 + 4K 2 ) F
y= + 2 = + =
Considering free body diagram of rod BC, (figure) 3 3 9K l 9K 2 9 K 1K 2
B a C 9 K 1K 2
2a or F= ...(iv)
( K 1 + 4K 2 )
F1 mg F2 Now, if the particle be released, it starts accelerating
F1 + F2 = mg ...(i) upwards due to excess compressive force in springs.
Hence, the restoring force is (K1y1 + K2y2), which is
Taking moments about B,
numerically equal to F.
mg × a = F2 × 3a
9 K 1K 2
1 or Restoring force = F = .y
or F2 = mg ( K 1 + 4K 2 )
3
Substituting this value in equation (i), F 9K 1 K 2
or Restoring acceleration, a = = .y
m m( K 1 + 4K 2 )
2
F1 = mg Since, acceleration is restoring and is directly
3
proportional to displacement y, therefore, the
Let the particle be pressed from its equilibrium
particle performs SHM. Its period of oscillations is
position by applying a force 'F'. Let left and right
springs be further compressed through y1 and y2, y
T = 2π
respectively. Increase in compressive forces in the a
spring will be K1y1 and K2y2 respectively. In other
words, total compressive forces in two springs will 2π m(K 1 + 4K 2 )
or T= Ans.
be (F1 + K1y1) and (F2 + K2y2) respectively. 3 K 1K 2
Now considering new free body diagram (figure) of
the rod BC,

2. A plane spiral coil is made on a thin insulated wire and To calculate rate of heat flow, first we have to
has N = 100 turns. Radii of inside and outside turns are calculate thermal resistance of this ice layer.
a = 10 cm and b = 20 cm respectively. A magnetic field Considering a concentric spherical shell of radius r
normal to the plane of spiral exists in the space. The [(R – x) < r < R] and radial thickness dr as shown in
magnetic field increases at a constant rate α = 0.3 figure.
tesla/second. Calculate potential difference between the
ends of the spiral.
R
Sol. Since, magnetic field is increasing, therefore flux r
linked with the coil is also increasing. Due to
increase in flux an emf is induced in it. Potential
difference between ends of the spiral coil is equal to (R–x)
magnitude of emf induced in it.
Since there are N turns in a radial width (b – a),
dr
therefore number of turns in the spiral coil per unit Its thermal resistance =
radial width is 4πr 2 K
N ∴ Total thermal resistance of ice layer
n= R
(b – a ) dr x
Consider a concentric circular ring of radius x and ∫
(R – x )
4πKr 2
=
4πKR (R – x )
radial thickness dx
Number of turns in this ring = n dx. Temperature just inside and outside the ice layer is
0ºC and (– θ)ºC, respectively.
Let at some instant magnetic field strength be B,
∴ Temperature difference = 0 – (– q) = θº C
Flux linked with the ring, φ = πx2B
θ
dφ Hence, rate of heat flow, H =
Emf induced in this ring = (n . dx)  x 
dt  
 4πKR (R – x ) 
 dB 
= (n . dx)  πx 2 2
 = πnα x dx 4πKRθ(R – x )
 dt  =
x
∴ Total emf induced in the spiral coil,
H
x =b rate of freezing of mass =
1 L
∫
2
e= (πnαx dx ) = πn α (b3 – a3)
3 H
x =a
∴ Rate of freezing of volume =
Substituting value of n, Lρ
1 dx
e= πN α(a2 + b2 + ab) = 2.2 volt Ans. But it is equal to 4π(R – x)2 .
3 dt
3. A spherical shell of radius R is filled with water. 4πKRθ(R – x ) dx

∴ = 4p (R – x)2 .
Temperature of atmosphere is (– θ) ºC. The shell is Lρx dt
exposed to atmosphere and all water comes down to Lρx (R – x )
0ºC and then it starts freezing from outer surface or . dx = dt
towards the centre of the shell. Assuming shell to be KRθ
highly conducting, calculate time for whole mass of At instant t = 0, thickness of ice layer was equal to
water to freeze. Thermal conductivity of ice is K and x = 0 and we have to calculate time t when whole
latent heat of its fusion is L. Density of water is ρ. mass has frozen or when x = R
Neglect expansion during freezing. Substituting these limits,
Sol. Heat flows from water to atmosphere because t
Lρ
R
atmospheric temperature is below 0ºC. Water is

filled in spherical shell, therefore heat flows in radial
∫0
dt =
KRθ ∫
x (R – x )dx
0
direction. 2
ρLR
Let at some instant t, thickness of ice layer be x. or t= Ans.
Then a concentric sphere of radius (R – x) is in 6Kθ
liquid form as shown in figure. Heat flows from this
sphere to atmosphere through ice layer.

4. In a Young's experiment, the upper slit is covered by a s
thin glass plate of refractive index µ1 = 1.4 while the But phase difference, φ = 2π where s is shift of
ω
lower slit is covered by another glass plate having the fringe pattern.
same thickness as the first one but having refractive
 1
index µ2 = 1.7. Interference pattern is observed using Hence, s =  n +  ω.
light of wavelength λ = 5400 Å. It is found that the  6
point P on the screen where the central maxima fell But s lies between 5ω and 5.5 ω, therefore,
before the glass plates ware inserted, now has 3/4 the  1 31 λD
original intensity. It is further observed that what used s = 5 +  ω = ω where ω =
 6 6 d
to be the fifth maxima earlier, lies below the point P
while the sixth minima lies above the point P. 31λD
∴ s= where D is distance of screen from
Neglecting absorption of light by glass plates, calculate 6d
thickness of the glass plates. slits and d is distance between slits.
Sol. If glass plates are not inserted in slits, central Let thickness of each glass plate be t.
maximum occurs at perpendicular bisector of slits. ∴ Upward shift due to upper glass plate,
Hence, point P lies on perpendicular bisector of S1S2 (µ – 1) tD
as shown in figure. s1 = 1
d
Screen
and downward shift due to lower glass plate,
(µ – 1) tD
s2 = 2
S1 d
P ∴ Resultant downward shift s = s2 – s1.
Substituting values of s, s1 and s2,
S2 31λ
t= = 9.3 µm Ans.
6(µ 2 – µ1 )
When a plate is inserted in upper slit, the
interference pattern shifts upwards and due to plate 5. A point isotropic light source of power P = 12 watt is
inserted in lower slit, it shifts downwards. located on the axis of a circular mirror plate of radius
Since, distance of nth maxima (nth bright fringe) R = 3 cm. If distance of source from the plate is
from central bright fringe is nω, where ω is fringe a = 39 cm and reflection coefficient of mirror plate is
width and fifth maxima now lies below the point P, α = 0.70, calculate force exerted by light rays on the plate.
therefore, shift of fringe pattern is downwards and it
Sol. When light rays are incident on the mirror plate, a
is greater that 5 ω.
part of then is reflected and a part is absorbed by the
Since, sixth minima (sixth dark fringe) lies above
plate. Therefore, momentum of light rays changes.
point P and distance of mth minima from central
Due to change in the momentum, a force is
 1 experienced by the plate. Magnitude of the force is
bright fringe is  m –  ω, therefore, shift of fringe
 2 equal to rate of change of momentum. To calculate
pattern is less than 5.5 ω. Hence, the shift lies rate of change of momentum, first we have to
between 5 ω and 5.5 ω. consider a circular ring coplanar and co-axial with
Let intensity of light due to each slit be I0. Then the plate. Let the radius of that ring be x and radial
l1 = l2 = l0. thickness dx as shown figure
Since, before insertion of glass plates, a bright fringe
(central bright fringe) was formed at P, therefore,
original intensity at P was equal to Imax.
θ
But Imax = ( I1 + I 2 )2 = 4I0
Source
But now intensity at P is 3/4 of the original intensity,
therefore now intensity at P is
I = 3/4 Imax = 3I0.
a
But I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos φ where φ is phase
Distance of every point of this ring from the source
difference between two rays reaching P. is
Substituting I1 = I2 = I0 and I = 3I0 in above
equation, r = a2 + x2 .
1 Hence, intensity of light incident on the ring is
cos φ = or φ = (2nπ + π/3) where n is an integer P
2 I=
4πr 2

Direction of incident rays is inclined at angle θ with 1
normal to the plane of ring. Therefore, power = [(0.7 p cos θ) × 2 + (0.3 p cos θ)]
c
incident on the ring, p = (2πxdx)I cos θ But it is equal to force dF on the ring.
P cos θx dx
or p= Pa 2 x dx
2r 2 ∴ dF = 0.85
c( a 2 + x 2 ) 2
Since, incident power is in the form of light rays
which are incident at angle θ with normal to the or Total force on the plate,
x =R
plate, therefore, net rate of incidence of momentum 0.85 Pa 2 x dx
on the ring considered F=
c
x =0
∫(a 2 + x 2 ) 2
P cos θ P cos 2 θ x dx
= = 0.85 Pa 2 1 1 
c 2r 2 c =  2 – 2 2 
Since, 70% of the rays are reflected and 30% are 2c  a (a + R ) 
absorbed by the plate, therefore, rate of change of
0.85 PR 2
momentum from the ring considered = = 1 × 10–10 N Ans.
2( a 2 + R 2 ) c
NUCLEAR REACTOR TYPES – ARE THEY REALLY SAFE?

The nuclear power industry along with the reactor technology has been constantly developing for more than five
decades now. Nuclear reactors can be classified based on their nuclear reaction, the moderator material used,
generation of the reactor, fuel phase, fuel type, coolant used, etc. The fission nuclear reactors are mostly dealt with
because the fusion reactors are still in the developing stages and the fission reactors are already being used for the past
six decades.
• Based on nuclear reaction

This type refers to the thermal (slow) reactors and the fast reactors based on the speed of neutrons. Thermal
reactors are the most affordable and common as they use the natural and raw uranium; and the neutrons are
decelerated from their natural speed when emitted from the broken atomic nuclei, and uses a moderating material
in the process. The Fast reactors are very expensive that require more enriched fuel.
• Based on moderator material
Thermal reactors (because of the presence of the moderating material), and Graphite, Normal water and Heavy
water are also used as moderators. The moderating materials in the Graphite and the Heavy water reactors
thermalize the neutrons and keep the natural uranium intact without any enrichment.
• Based on generation
Generation I reactors were the first prototype reactors, Generation II used standard designs till 50s, Generation III
were more modern, lightweighted, more efficient and were used till late 90s, the latest i.e. Generation IV reactors
targeting on economical and minimal waste, are still in the research and development stage which may officially
work until late 2020s.
• Based on fuel phase and fuel type
It is Solid, Liquid or Gas reactor where Solid is most typical. The fuel type reactors also come with fuel phase-
uranium or thorium, which are available in abundant quantities on the land.

P HYSICS F UNDAMENTAL F OR IIT-J EE
Matter Waves, Photo-electric Effect

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
Matter Waves : particle duality. In certain circumstances, it

behaves like a wave, while in other circumstances
Planck's quantum theory : Wave-particle duality - it behaves like a particle.
Planck gave quantum theory while explaining the
The wave-particle is not the sole monopoly of
radiation spectrum of a black body. According to
e.m. waves. Even a material particle in motion
Planck's theory, energy is always exchanged in
according to de Broglie will have a wavelength.
integral multiples of a quanta of light or photon.
The de Broglie wavelength λ of the matter waves
Each photon has an energy E that depends only is also given by :
on the frequency ν of electromagnetic radiation h h h
and is given by : λ= = =
mv p 2mK
E = hν .....(1)
–34 where K is the kinetic energy of the particle.
where h = 6.6 × 10 joule-sec, is Planck's
constant. In any interaction, the photon either If a particle of mass m kg and charge q coulomb
gives up all of its energy or none of it. is accelerated from rest through a potential
difference of V volt. Then
From Einstein's mass-energy equivalence
principle, we have 1
mv2 = qV or mv = 2mqV
E = mc 2
.....(2) 2
h 12.34
Using equations (1) and (2), we get ; Hence, λ = = Å
2mqV V
hν
mc2 = hν or m = .....(3)
c2 Photoelectric effect :
where m represents the mass of a photon in When light of suitable frequency (electromagnetic
motion. The velocity v of a photon is equal to radiation) is allowed to fall on a metal surface,
that of light, i.e., v = c. electrons are emitted from the surface. These
electrons are known as photoelectrons and the effect
According to theory of relativity, the rest mass m0 is known as photoelectric effect. Photoelectric
of a photon is given by : effect, light energy is converted into electrical
energy.
v2
m0 = m 1 − Laws of photolectric effect :
c2
The kinetic energy of the emitted electron is
hν independent of intensity of incident radiation.
Here, m= and v = c
c2 But the photoelectric current increases with the
Hence, m0 = 0 ....(4) increase of intensity of incident radiation.
The kinetic energy of the emitted electron
i.e., rest mass of photon is zero, i.e., energy of
depends on the frequency of the incident
photon is totally kinetic.
radiation. It increases with the increase of
The momentum p of each photon is given by : frequency of incident radiation.
If the frequency of the incident radiation is less
hν hν h h
p = mc = ×c= = = ......(5) than a certain value, then photoelectric emission
c 2
c c/ν λ is not possible. This frequency is known as
The left hand side of the above equation involves threshold frequency. This threshold frequency
the particle aspect of photons (momentum) while varies from emitter to emitter, i.e., depends on
the right hand side involves the wave aspect the material.
(wavelength) and the Planck's constant is the There is no time lag between the arrival of light
bridge between the two sides. This shows that and the emission of photoelectrons, i.e., it is an
electromagnetic radiation exhibits a wave- instantaneous phenomenon.

Failure of wave theory : (c) According to Einstein's equation, if the frequency
Wave theory of light could not explain the laws of of incident radiation is less than certain minimum
value, the photoelectric emission is not possible.
photoelectric effect.
This frequency is known as threshold frequency.
According to wave theory, the kinetic energy of Hence, the frequency of incident radiation below
the emitted electrons should increase with the which photoelectric emission is not possible is
increase of intensity of incident radiation. known as threshold frequency or cut-off
Kinetic energy of the emitted electron does not frequency. It is given by :
depend on the frequency of incident radiation hν − (1 / 2)mv 2
ν0 =
according to wave theory. h
Wave theory failed to explain the existence of On the other hand, if the wavelength of the
incident radiation is more than certain critical
threshold frequency.
value, then photoelectric emission is not possible.
According to wave theory there must be a time This wavelength is known as threshold
lag between the arrival of light and emission of wavelength of cut-off wavelength. It is given by :
photoelectrons. hc
λ0 =
Einstein's theory of photoelectric effect : [hν − (1 / 2)mv 2 ]
Einstein explained the laws of photoelectric effect (d) Since Einstein treated photoelectric effect as a
on the basis of Planck's quantum theory of collision between a photon and an atom, he
explained the instantaneous nature of
radiation.
Einstein treated photoelectric effect as a collision Some other important points :
between a photon and an atom in which photon is Stopping potential : The negative potential
absorbed by the atom and an electron is emitted. applied to the collector in order to prevent the
According to law of conservation of energy, electron from reaching the collector (i.e., to
reduce the photoelectric current to zero) is known
1 as stopping potential.
h ν = h ν0 + mv2
2 1
eV0 = mv 2max . = hν – W = h(ν – ν0)
where hν is the energy of the incident photon; hv0 2
is the minimum energy required to detach the Millikan measured K.E. of emitted electrons or
stopping potentials for different frequencies of
electron from the atom (work function or
incident radiation for a given emitter. He plotted a
ionisation energy) and (1/2) mv2 is the kinetic graph with the frequency on x-axis and stopping
energy of the emitted electron. potential on y-axis. The graph so obtained was a
The above equation is known as Einstein's straight line as shown in figure.
photoelectric equation. Kinetic energy of the
V0(stopping potential)
emitted electron,
1
= mv2 = h(ν – ν0) = hν – W
2
Explanation of laws of photoelectric effect :
(a) The KE of the emitted electron increases with the ν0
increase of frequency of incident radiation since Frequency of incident light
W (work function) is constant for a given emitter. Millikan measured the slope of the straight line
KE is directly proportional to (ν – ν0) (=h/e) and calculated the value of Planck's constant.
(b) Keeping the frequency of incident radiation I
constant if the intensity of incident light is
increased, more photons collide with more atoms Full intensity
and more photoelectrons are emitted. The KE of 75% intensity
the emitted electron remains constant since the 50% intensity
same photon collides with the same atom (i.e., the 25% intensity
nature of the collision does not change). With the – V0 +
increase in the intensity of incident light
Potential difference
photoelectric current increases.

The intercept of V0 versus ν graph on frequency (ii) At stopping potential, if the wavelength of the
axis is equal to threshold frequency (ν0). From incident light is kept at 4000 Å but the intensity
this, the work function (hν0) can be calculated. of light is increased two times, will photoelectric
Graphs in photoelectric effect : current be obtained? Give reasons for your
(a) Photoelectric current versus potential difference answer.
graphs for varying intensity (keeping same metal hc
plate and same frequency of incident light) : Sol. (i) We have = eV1 + W
λ1
These graphs indicate that stopping potential is
independent of the intensity and saturation current hc
and = eV2 + W
is directly proportional to the intensity of light. λ2
ν2>ν1
I  1 1 
⇒ hc −  = e(V2 – V1)
 λ 2 λ1 
ν2 e(V2 − V1 ) 1.6 × 10 −19 (1.85 − 0.82)
ν1 or h = =
 1 1   1 1 
e −  3 × 108  −7
− −7

– (V0)2 (V0)1 + λ
 2 λ 1  3 × 10 4 × 10 
Potential difference = 6.592 × 10–34 Js
(b) Photoelectric current versus potential difference (ii) No, because the stopping potential depends only
graphs for varying frequency (keeping same on the wavelength of light and not on its intensity.
metal plate and same intensity of incident light) :
These graphs indicate that the stopping potential
is constant for a given frequency. The stopping 2. A small plate of a metal (work function = 1.17 eV) is
potential increases with increase of frequency. plated at a distance of 2m from a monochromatic
The KE of the emitted electrons is proportional to light source of wavelength 4.8 × 10–7 m and power
the frequency of incident light. 1.0 watt. The light falls normally on the plate. Find
the number of photons striking the metal plate per
square metre per second. If a constant magnetic field
Stopping potential
ν0
of strength 10–4 tesla is parallel to the metal surface,
find the radius of the largest circular path followed by
A1 A2 A3 Frequency the emitted photoelectrons.
B1
hc 6.6 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108
B2 Sol. Energy of one photon = =
λ 4.8 × 10 −7
B3
= 4.125 × 10–19 J
(c) Stopping potential versus frequency graphs for Number of photons emitted per second
different metals : These graphs indicate that the
stops is same for all metal, since they are parallel 1.0
= = 2.424 × 1018
−19
straight lines. The slope is a universal constant 4.125 × 10
(=h/e). Further, the threshold frequency varies Number of photons striking the plate per square
with emitter since the intercepts on frequency axis
metre per second
are different for different metals.
2.424 × 1018
= = 4.82 × 1016
4 × 3.14 × (2) 2
Solved Examples Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted
from the plate
1. (i) A stopping potential of 0.82 V is required to stop
the emission of photoelectrons from the surface hc
Emax = –W
of a metal by light of wavelength 4000 Å. For λ
light of wavelength 3000 Å, the stopping = 4.125 × 10–19 – 1.17 × 1.6 × 10–19
potential is 1.85 V. Find the value of Planck's
constant. = 2.253 × 10–19 J

3. A monochromatic light source of frequency (ii) Energy of the photon emitted from a hydrogen
ν illuminates a metallic surface and ejects atom
photoelectrons. The photoelectrons having maximum hc 1 1
energy are just able to ionize the hydrogen atom in hν = =  − 
λ 2 2
32 
ground state. When the whole experiment is repeated
with an incident radiation of frequency (5/6) ν, the = 1.888 eV
photoelectrons so emitted are able to excite the Wavelength of radiation,
hydrogen atom beam which then emits a radiation of
6.62 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108
wavelength 1215 Å. Find the work function of the λ=
metal and the frequency ν. 1.888 × 1.6 × 10 −19
Sol. In the first case, = 6.572 × 10–7m
Emax = Ionization energy = 13.6 eV = 6572 Å
= 21.76 × 10–19 J (iii) Work function of metal W = hν – Emax
= 1.8888 – 0.8588
So, hν = 21.76 × 10–19 J ....(1)
= 1.03 eV
In the second case,
hc
E'max = 5. X-rays are produced in an X-ray tube by electrons
λ accelerated through a potential difference of 50.0 kV.
6.6 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108 An electron makes three collisions in the target
=
1215 × 10 −10 before coming to rest and loses half of its kinetic
energy in each of the first two collisions. Determine
=16.3×10–19 J
the wavelengths of the resulting photons. Neglect the
5νh recoil of the heavy target atoms.
So, = 16.3 × 10–19 + W ...(2)
6
Sol. Initial kinetic energy of the electron = 50.0 keV
Dividing Eq.(1) by Eq.(2)
Kinetic energy after first collision = 25.0 keV
6 21.76 × 10 −19 + W Energy of the photon produced in the first collision,
=
5 16.3 × 10 −19 + W E1 = 50.0 – 25.0 = 25.0 keV
Solving, we get
Wavelength of this photon
W = 11.0 × 10 – 19 J = 6.875 eV
hc 6.6 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108
21.76 × 10 −19 + 11.0 × 10 −19 λ1 = =
From Eq.(1) ν = E1 1.6 × 10 −19 × 25.0 × 103
6.6 × 10 −34
= 0.495 × 10–10 m = 0.495 Å
= 5 × 1015 Hz
4. The radiation, emitted when an electron jumps from Kinetic energy of the electron after second collision
n = 3 to n = 2 orbit in a hydrogen atom, falls on a = 12.5 eV
metal to produce photoelectrons. The electrons from Energy of the photon produced in the second
the metal surface with maximum kinetic energy are collision, E2 = 25.0 – 12.5 = 12.5 keV
made to move perpendicular to a magnetic field of
1/320 T in a radius of 10–3 m. Find (i) the kinetic Wavelength of this photon
energy of electrons, (ii) wavelength of radiation and
hc 6.6 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108
(iii) the work function of metal. λ2 = =
E2 1.6 × 10 −19 × 12.5 × 103
Sol. (i) Speed of an electron in the magnetic field,
Ber = 0.99 × 10–10 m
v=
m = 0.99 Å
Kinetic energy of electrons Kinetic energy of the electron after third collision = 0
1 B 2e 2 r 2 Energy of the photon produced in the third collision,
Emax = mv2 = E3 = 12.5 – 0 = 12.5 keV
2 2m
2 This is same as E2. Therefore, wavelength of this
 1  (1.6 × 10 −19 ) 2 × (10 −3 ) 2
=   × photon, λ3 = λ2 = 0.99 Å.
 320  2 × 9.1× 10 −31
= 1.374 × 10–19 J
= 0.8588 eV

P HYSICS F UNDAMENTAL F OR IIT-J EE
Thermal Expansion, Thermodynamics

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
Thermal Expansion : Where ∆t is the loss or gain in time in a time interval t

.(a) When the temperature of a substance is increased, ∆T is change in temperature and d is coefficient of
it expands. The heat energy which is supplied to linear expansion.
the substance is gained by the constituent If a rod is heated or cooled but not allowed to expand
particles of the substance as its kinetic energy. or contract then the thermal stresses developed
Because of this the collisions between the F
constituents particles are accompanied with = γα∆T.
greater force which increase the distance between A
the constituent particles. If a scale is calibrated at a temperature T1 but used at
a temperature T2, then the observed reading will be
∆l = lα∆T ; ∆A = Aβ∆T ; ∆V = Vγ∆T
wrong. In this case the actual reading is given by
or l' = l (1 + α∆T) ; A' = A(1 + β∆T) ;
R = R0(1 + α∆T)
V' = V(1 + γ∆T) Where R0 is the observed reading, R is the actual
(b) Also ρ = ρ'(1 + γ∆T) where ρ' is the density at reading.
higher temperature clearly ρ' < ρ for substances For difference between two rods to the same at all
which have positive value of γ temperatures l 1α1 = l2α2.
* β = 2α and γ = 3α Thermodynamics
Water has negative value of γ for certain temperature According to first law of thermodynamics
range (0º to 4ºC). This means that for that q = ∆U + W
temperature range the volume decreases with
increase in temperature. In other words the density For an isothermal process (for a gaseous system)
increases with increase in temperature. (a) The pressure volume relationship is ρV = constt.
(b) ∆U = 0
(c) q = W
30 ml
(d) W = 2.303 nRT log10
25 ml
20 ml Vf p
= 2.303 nRT log10 i
15 ml Vi pf
10 ml (e) Graphs T2 > T1
5 ml P
P V
0 ml
If a liquid is kept in a container and the temperature T2
of the system is increased then the volume of the T1
liquid as well as the container increases. The V T T
apparent change in volume of the liquid as shown by These lines are called isotherms (parameters at
the scale is constant temperature)
∆Vapp = V(γ – 3α) ∆T For an adiabatic process (for a gaseous system)
Where V is the volume of liquid at lower temperature (a) The pressure-volume relationship is PVγ = constt.
∆Vapp is the apparent change in volume (b) The pressure-volume-temperature relationship is
γ is the coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid PV
= constt.
T
α is the coefficients of linear expansion of the
container. (c) From (a) and (b) TVγ–I = constt.
Loss or gain in time by a pendulum clock with (d) q = 0
1 (e) W = –∆U
change in temperature is ∆t = α(∆T) × t
2

R Step 3: Execute the solution as follows:
(f) ∆U = ncv∆T where cv =
γ −1 Solve for the target variables. Often you will be
given two temperatures and asked to compute ∆T.
piVi − p f V f nR(Ti − T f )
(g) W = = Or you may be given an initial temperature T0 and
γ −1 γ −1 asked to find a final temperature corresponding to
(h) Graphs a given length or volume change. In this case,
P V plan to find ∆T first; then the final temperature is
P
T0 + ∆T.
Unit consistency is crucial, as always. L0 and ∆L
(or V0 ∆V) must have the same units, and if you
V T T
use a value or α or β in K–1 or (Cº)–1, then ∆T
Please note that P-V graph line (isotherm) is must be in kelvins or Celsius degrees (Cº). But
steeper. you can use K and Cº interchangeably.
For isochoric process Step 4: Evaluate your answer: Check whether your
(a) P ∝ T results make sense. Remember that the sizes of holes
(b) W = 0 in a material expand with temperature just as the
(c) q = ∆U same way as any other linear dimension, and the
volume of a hole (such as the volume of a container)
R
(d) ∆U = nCv∆T where Cv = expands the same way as the corresponding solid
γ −1 shape.
(e) Graphs Problem solving strategy : Thermodynamics Ist Law
P P V Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts : The first law
of thermodynamics is the statement of the law of
conservation of energy in its most general form. You
can apply it to any situation in which you are
V T T
concerned with changes in the internal energy of a
For isobaric process system, with heat flow into or out of a system, and/or
(a) V ∝ T with work done by or on a system.
(b) W = P∆V = P(Vf – Vi) = nR(Tf – Ti) Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps
(c) ∆U = nCv∆T Carefully define what the thermodynamics system is.
(d) q = nCp∆T The first law of thermodynamics focuses on
systems that go through thermodynamic
(e) Graphs processes. Some problems involve processes
P P V with more than one step. so make sure that you
identify the initial and final state for each step.
Identify the known quantities and the target
V T T variables.
For a cyclic process Check whether you have enough equations. The
(a) ∆U = 0 ⇒ q = W first law, ∆U = Q – W, can be applied just once to
each step in a thermodynamic process, so you will
(b) Work done is the area enclosed in p-V graph.
often need additional equations. These often
For any process depicted by P-V diagram, area under V2
the graph represents the word done.
Kirchoff's law states that good absorbers are good
include Eq. W = ∫ p dV
V1
for the work done in a
emitters also.
volume change and the equation of state of the
Problem solving Strategy : Thermal Expansion material that makes up the thermodynamic system
Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts: Decide (for an ideal gas, pV = nRT).
whether the problem involves changes in length Step 3: Execute the solution as follows :
(linear thermal expansion) or in volume (volume
thermal expansion) You shouldn't be surprised to be told that
Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps: consistent units are essential. If p is a Pa and V in
m3, then W is in joules. Otherwise, you may want
Eq. ∆L = αL0∆T for linear expansion and to convert the pressure and volume units into
Eq. ∆V = βV0∆T for volume expansion. units of Pa and m3. If a heat capacity is given in
Identify which quantities in Eq. ∆L = αL0∆T or terms of calories, usually the simplest procedure
∆V = βV0∆T are known and which are the is to convert it to joules. Be especially careful
unknown target variables. with moles. When you use n = mtot/M to convert

between total mass and number of moles, 5 V25 ρ (1 + 75γ ) 1 + 75γ
remember that if mtot is in kilograms, M must be = × 100 =
4.9 V25 × 1.0027 ρ100 1.0027
in kilograms per mole. The usual units for M are
grams per mole; be careful ! or γ = 3.1 × 10–4 (ºC)–1
The internal energy change ∆U in any 2. A one litre flask contains some mercury. It is found
thermodynamic process or series of processes in that at different temperature the volume of air inside
independent of the path, whether the substance is the flask remains the same. What is the volume of
an ideal gas or not. This point is of the utmost mercury in flask ? Given that the coefficient of linear
importance in the problems in this topic. expansion of glass = 9 × 10–6(ºC)–1 and coefficient of
Sometimes you will be given enough information volume expansion of mercury = 1.8 × 10–4 (ºC–1).
about one path between the given initial and final Sol. Let V = Volume of the vessel
states to calculate ∆U for that path. Since ∆U is V' = Volume of mercury
the same for every possible path between the For unoccupied volume to remain constant increase
same two states, you can then relate the various in volume of mercury should be equal to increase in
energy quantities for other paths. volume of vessel.
When a process consists of several distinct steps, V × γg
∴ V' γm∆T = Vγg∆T or V' =
it often helps to make a chart showing Q, W, and γm
∆U for each step. Put these quantities for each
1000 × 27 × 10 −6
step on a different line, and arrange them so the ∴ V' = = 150 cm3
−4
Q's, W's, and ∆U's form columns. Then you can 1.8 × 10
apply the first law to each line ; in addition, you
3. A clock with a metallic pendulum gains 6 seconds
can add each column and apply the first law to the
each day when the temperature is 20ºC and loses 12
sums. Do you see why ?
seconds each day when the temperature is 40ºC. Find
Using above steps, solve for the target variables. the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal.
Step 4: Evaluate your answer : Check your results for Sol. Time taken for one oscillation of the pendulum is
reasonableness. In particular, make sure that each of L L
your answers has the correct algebraic sign. T = 2π or T2 = 4π2 × .....(1)
g g
Remember that a positive Q means that heat flows
into the system, and that a negative Q means that heat Partially differentiating, we get
flows into the system, and that a negative Q means ∆L
2T∆t = 4π2 × .....(2)
that heat flows out of the system. A positive W g
means that work is done by the system on its Dividing (2) by (1), we get
environment, while a negative W means that work is ∆T ∆L α L ∆t 1
done on the system by its environment. = = = α∆t
T 2L 2L 2
where ∆t is the change in temperature. Now,
Solved Examples One day = 24 hours = 86400 sec
Let t be the temperature at which the clock keeps
correct time.
1. A metallic bob weighs 50 g in air. It it is immersed
At 20ºC, the gain in time is
in a liquid at a temperature of 25ºC, it weighs 45 g.
When the temperature of the liquid is raised to 100ºC, 1
6 = α × (t – 20) × 86400 ....(3)
it weighs 45.1 g. Calculate the coefficient of cubical 2
expansion of the liquid given that the coefficient of At 40ºC, the loss in time is
linear expansion of the metal is 2 × 10–6(ºC)–1. 1
12 = α× (40 – t) × 86400 ...(4)
Sol. Loss in weight in liquid at 25ºC = (50 – 45) = 5 gm 2
Weight of liquid displaced at 25ºC = V25ρ25g Dividing (4) by (3), we have
∴ 5 = V25ρ25g ...(1) 12 40 − t
Similarly, V100ρ100g = 50 – 45.1 = 4.9 gm ...(2) =
6 t − 20
From eq.(1) & (2) we get,
80
5 V ρ which gives t = ºC.
= 25 . 25 3
4.9 V100 ρ100
Using the value in equation(3), we have
Now, V100 = V25(1 + γmetal × 75)= V25(1 + 3αmetal × 75) 1  80 
= V25(1 + 3 × 12 × 10–6 × 75) 6= × α ×  − 20  × 86400
or V100 = V25(1 + 0.0027) = V25 × 1.0027 2  3 
Also, ρ25 = ρ100(1 + γ × 75) which gives α = 2.1 × 10–5 perºC
where, γ = Required coefficient of expansion of the liquid

4. A piston can freely move inside a horizontal cylinder
closed from both ends. Initially, the piston separates P0
the inside space of the cylinder into two equal parts
each of volume V0, in which an ideal gas is contained
under the same pressure p0 and at the same
temperature. What work has to be performed in order
to increase isothermally the volume of one part of gas
P0
η times compared to that of the other by slowly
moving the piston ? Sol. Let A1 = Cross section of upper piston
Sol. Let volume of chambers changes by ∆V. According A2 = Cross section of lower piston
to the problem, the final volume of left chamber is η T = Tension in the string
times final volume of right chamber. P = Gas pressure
∴ V0 + ∆V = η(V0 – ∆V) m1 = Mass of upper piston
 η −1 m2 = Mass of lower piston
or ∆V =  V0 Now, consider FBD of upper piston
 η +1
P0 A1
P0,v0,T0 P0,v0,T0
PA1 m1g
As piston is moved slowly therefore, change in From equilibrium consideration of upper piston
kinetic energy is zero. By work-energy theorem, we we get, P0A1 + T + m1g = PA1
can write Similarly, consider FBD of lower piston
ext
Wgas in right chamber + Wgas in left chamber + WAgent = ∆KE T
ext PA2
WAgent = (Wgas(R) + Wgas(L))
We know that in isothermal process, work done is
given by
Vf  P0 A2 m2g
W = nRT ln  
 ∴ P0A2 + T = m2g + PA2
 Vi  Eliminating T, we get
∴ Work done by gas in left chamber (WL) (m1 + m2 ) g
P = P0 +
 V + ∆V   2η  A1 − A2
= P0V0 ln  0  = P0V0 ln  
 V0   η +1 According to problem
Similarly, work done by gas in right chamber (WR) m = m1 + m2
 V − ∆V  and ∆S = A1 – A2
 2η 
= P0V0 ln  0  = P0V0 ln   mg
 V   η +1 ∴ P = P0 +
0
∆S
ext  2η   2η  Now, PV = RT
WAgent = –P0V0 ln   – P0V0 ln  
 η +1  η +1 P∆V
or P∆V = R∆T or ∆T =
2 R
 η +1 But ∆V = (A1 – A2)l = ∆S. l
= P0V0 ln  
 4η   mg 
∴ ∆T =  P0 +  ∆S.l
 ∆S 
5. A smooth vertical tube having two different sections
is open from both ends equipped with two pistons of
different areas figure. Each piston slides within a l l
respective tube section. One mole of ideal gas is
enclosed between the pistons tied with a non-
stretchable thread. The cross-sectional area of the
upper piston is ∆S greater than that of the lower one.
The combined mass of the two pistons is equal to m. l
The outside air pressure is P0. By how many kelvins
must the gas between the pistons be heated to shift
the pistons through l.

KEY CONCEPT
Organic
Chemistry CARBONYL COMPOUND
Fundamentals
R + .. R´´
Reduction of Aldehydes and Ketones by Hydride C = O + (C6H5)3P – C
Transfer : R R´´´
Aldehyde or Phosphorus ylide
ketone or phosphorane
R R
R δ+ δ– R R´´
– H – OH
H 3B – H + C=O H–C–O H–C–O–H C=C + O =P(C6H5)3
R´ R´ R´´´
R´ R´
Alkene Triphenyl phosphine
Hydride transfer Alkoxide ion Alcohol [(E) and(Z) isomers] oxide
This reaction, known as the Wittig reaction, has
These steps are repeated until all hydrogen atoms proved to be a valuable method for synthesizing
attached to boron have been transferred. alkenes. The Wittig reaction is applicable to a wide
Sodium borohydride is a less powerful reducing variety of compounds, and although a mixture of (E)
agent than lithium aluminum hydride. Lithium and (Z) isomers may result, the Wittig reaction offers
aluminum hydride reduces acids, aldehydes, and a great advantage over most other alkene syntheses in
ketones but sodium borohydride reduces only that no ambiguity exists as to the location of the
aldehydes and ketones : double bond in the product. (This is in contrast to E1
eliminations, which may yield multiple alkene
Reduced by LiAlH4 products by rearrangement to more stable carbocation
intermediates, and both E1 and E2 elimination
reactions, which may produce multiple products
Reduced by NaBH4 when different β hydrogens are available for
removal.)
O O O O Phosphorus ylides are easily prepared from
triphenylphosphine and primary or secondary alkyl
C < C < C < C halides. Their preparation involves two reactions :
R O– R OR´ R R´ R H
General Reaction
Reaction 1
Ease of reduction R´´ R´´
+
(C6H5)3P : + CH – X → (C6H5)3P – CH X–
Lithium aluminum hydride reacts violently with
R´´´ R´´´
water, and therefore reductions with lithium
Triphenylphosphine An alkyltriphenylphosphonium
aluminum hydride must be carried out in anhydrous halide
solutions, usually in anhydrous ether. (Ethyl acetate
is added cautiously after the reaction is over to Reaction 2
decompose excess LiAlH4; then water is added to R´´ R´´
+ +
decompose the aluminum complex.) Sodium – –
(C6H5)3P – C – H : B → (C6H5)3P – C : + H:B
borohydride reductions, by contrast, can be carried R´´´ R´´´
out in water or alcohol solutions.
A phosphorus ylide
The Addition of Ylides : The Wittig reaction : Specific Example
Aldehydes and ketones react with phosphorus ylides Reaction 1
to yield alkenes and triphenylphosphine oxide. (An +
ylide is a neutral molecule having a negative carbon (C6H5)3P : + CH3Br C→
6H6
(C6H5)3P – CH3Br –
adjacent to a positive heteroatom.) Phosphorus ylides
Methyltriphenylphosphonium
are also called phosphoranes : bromide (89%)
Reaction 2

+ – +
(C6H5)3P – CH3 + C6H5Li → O + :CH2 – P(C6H5)3 CH2
–
Br +
(C6H5)3P – CH2 :– + C6H6 + LiBr –
O P(C6H5)3
+
The first reaction is a nucleophilic substitution
reaction. Triphenylphosphine is an excellent
nucleophile and a weak base. It reacts readily with 1º CH2 + O=P(C6H5)3 CH2
and 2º alkyl halide by an SN2 mechanism to displace
a halide ion from the alkyl halide to give an Methylenecyclohexane O – P(C6H5)3
alkyltriphenylphosphonium salt. The second reaction (86%)
is an acid-base reaction. A strong base (usually an Michael Additions :
alkyllithium or phenyllithium) removes a proton from Conjugate additions of enolate anions to
the carbon that is attached to phosphorus to give the α-β-unsaturated carbonyl compound are known
ylide. generally as Michael additions. An example is the
Phosphorus ylides can be represented as a hybrid of addition of cyclohexanone to C6H5CH=CHCOC6H5 :
the two resonance structures shown here. Quantum C6H5
mechanical calculations indicate that the contribution O O O O
made by the first structure is relatively unimportant. – C H CH=CH–CC H CH
OH– 6 5 6 5
R´´ + R´´ CHδ–
(C6H5)3P = C (C6H5)3P – C :–
R´´´ R´´´ C—Oδ–
+
The mechanism of the Wittig reaction has been the +H3O
O– C6H5
subject of considerable study. An early mechanistic
proposal suggested that the ylide, acting as a C6H5
carbanion, attacks the carbonyl carbon of the O
aldehyde or ketone to form an unstable intermediate CH H
with separated charges called a betaine. In the next C
step, the betaine is envisioned as becoming an H
unstable four-membered cyclic system called an C=O
oxaphosphetane, which then spontaneously loses
triphenylphosphine oxide to become an alkene. C6H5
However, studies by E. Vedejs and others suggest
that the betaine is not an intermediate and that the The sequence that follows illustrates how a conjugate
oxaphosphetane is formed directly by a cycloaddition aldol addition (Michael addition) followed by a
reaction. The driving force for the Wittig reaction is simple aldol condensation may be used to build one
the formation of the very strong (∆Hº = 540 kJ mol–1) ring onto another. This procedure is known as the
phosphorus –oxygen bond in triphenylphosphine Robinson anulation (ring-forming) reaction (after the
oxide. English chemist, Sir Robert Robinon, who won the
Nobel Prize in chemistry in 1947 for his research on
naturally occurring compounds) :
R´ R ´´ R ´ R ´´ R ´ R ´´
–
R–C + :C–R´´´´ R – C – C – R´´´ R – C – C – R´´´ O O CH3
O
:O: –
.. P(C6H5)3
:O: .. – P(C6H5)3
:O CH3 OH–
CH2
P(C6H5)3
+ + + CH2 = CHCCH3 CH OH CH2
3
Aldehyde Ylide Betaine Oxaphosphetane O (conjugate O C
or ketone (may not be formed) addition)
2-Methylcyclo- Methyl vinyl O
hexane-1, 3-dione ketone
H3C
aldol base
condensation (–H2O)
R´ R´´
C = C + O = P(C6H5)3 O
CH3
R R´´´
Alkene Triphenylphosphine
(+diastereomer) oxide
O
(65%)
Specific Example :

KEY CONCEPT
Inorganic CO-ORDINATION COMPOUND

Chemistry
& METALLURGY
Fundamentals
Tetragonal distortion of octahedral complexes (Jahn- orbitals are no longer equal in energy. If the d z 2
Teller distortion) :
orbital contains one.
The shape of transition metal complexes are affected
by whether the d orbitals are symmetrically or Asymmetrical electronic arrangements :
asymmetrically filled.
Repulsion by six ligands in an octahedral complex Electronic t2g eg
configurati
splits the d orbitals on the central metal into t2g and eg on
levels. It follows that there is a corresponding
repulsion between the d electrons and the ligands. If d4
the d electrons are symmetrically arranged, they will
d7
repel all six ligands equally. Thus the structure will
be a completely regular octahedron. The symmetrical
d9
arrangements of d electrons are shown in Table.
Symmetrical electronic arrangements :
more electron than the d x 2 − y 2 orbital then the ligands
Electronic t2g eg
configurat approaching along +z and –z will encounter greater
ion repulsion than the other four ligands. The repulsion
d5 and distortion result in elongation of the octahedron
along the z axis. This is called tetragonal distortion.
d6 Strictly it should be called tetragonal elongation. This
form of distortion is commonly obsered.
d8 If the d x 2 − y 2 orbital contains the extra electron, then
d10 elongation will occur along the x and y axes. This
means that the ligands approach more closely along
the z-axis. Thus there will be four long bonds and
All other arrangements have an asymmetrical two short bonds. This is equivalent to compressing
arrangement of d electrons. If the d electrons are the octahedron along the z axis, and is called
asymmetrically arranged, they will repel some tetragonal compression, and it is not possible to
ligands in the complex more than others. Thus the predict which will occur.
structure is distorted because some ligands are For example, the crystal structure of CrF2 is a
prevented from approaching the metal. distorted rutile (TiO2) structure. Cr2+ is octahedrally
as closely as others. The eg orbitals point directly at surrounded by six F–, and there are four Cr–F bonds
the ligands. Thus asymmetric filling of the eg orbitals of length 1.98 – 2.01 Å, and two longer bonds of
in some ligands being repelled more than others. This length 2.43 Å. The octahedron is said to be
causes a significant distortion of the octahedral tetragonally distorted. The electronic arrangement in
shape. In contrast the t2g orbitals do not point directly Cr2+ is d4. F– is a weak field ligand, and so the t2g
at the ligands, but point in between the ligand level contains three electrons and the eg level contains
directions. Thus asymmetric filling of the t2g orbitals one electron. The d x 2 − y 2 orbital has four lobes whilst
has only a very small effect on the stereochemistry.
Distortion caused by asymmetric filling of the t2g the d z 2 orbital has only two lobes pointing at the
orbitals is usually too small to measure. The ligands. To minimize repulsion with the ligands, the
electronic arrangements which will produce a large single eg electron will occupy the d z 2 orbital. This is
distortion are shown in Table.
equivalent to splitting the degeneracy of the eg level
The two eg orbitals d x 2 − y 2 and d z 2 are normally so that d z 2 is of lower energy, i.e. more stable, and
degenerate. However, if they are asymmetrically d x 2 − y 2 is of higher energy, i.e. less stable. Thus the
filled then this degeneracy is destroyed, and the two

two ligands approaching along the +z and –z 2NaAg(CN)2 + Zn → Na2Zn(CN)4 + 2Ag ↓
directions are subjected to greater repulsion than the 2NaAu(CN)2 + Zn → Na2Zn(CN)4 + 2Au ↓
four ligands along +x, –x, +y and –y. This causes
tetragonal distortion with four short bonds and two Soluble complex
long bonds. In the same way MnF3 contains Mn3+ Special Methods :
with a d4 configuration, and forms a tetragonally Mond's process : Nickel is purified by this method.
distorted octahedral structure. Impure nickel is treated with carbon monoxide at 60–
Many Cu(+II) salts and complexes also show 80º C when volatile compound, nickel carbonyl, is
tetragonally distorted octahedral structures. Cu2+ has formed. Nickel carbonyl decomposes at 180ºC to
a d9 configuration : form pure nickel and carbon monoxide which can
t2g eg again be used.
Impure nickel + CO 60–80ºC NI(CO)4
To minimize repulsion with the ligands, two Gaseous compound
electrons occupy the d z 2 orbital and one electron 180ºC
occupies the d x 2 − y 2 orbital. Thus the two ligands Ni + 4CO
along –z and –z are repelled more strongly than are Zone refining or Fractional crystallisation :
the other four ligands. Elements such as Si, Ge, Ga, etc., which are used as
The examples above show that whenever the d z 2 and semiconductors are refined by this method. Highly
pure metals are obtained. The method is based on the
d x 2 − y 2 orbitals are unequally occupied, distortion
difference in solubility of impurities in molten and
occurs. This is know as Jahn–Teller distortion. solid state of the metal. A movable heater is fitted
Leaching : around a rod of the impure metal. The heater is
slowly moved across the rod. The metal melts at the
It involves the treatment of the ore with a suitable
point of heating and as the heater moves on from one
reagents as to make it soluble while impurities
end of the rod to the other end, the pure metal
remain insoluble. The ore is recovered from the
crystallises while the impurities pass on the adjacent
solution by suitable chemical method. For example,
melted zone.
bauxite ore contains ferric oxide, titanium oxide and
silica as impurities. When the powdered ore is Molten zone
digested with an aqueous solution of sodium containing
hydroxide at about 150ºC under pressure, the alumina impurity
(Al2O3) dissolves forming soluble sodium meta-
aluminate while ferric oxide (Fe2O3), TiO2 and silica
remain as insoluble part.
Al2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + H2O
Pure metal
Pure alumina is recovered from the filtrate Impure
Moving circular zone
NaAlO2 + 2H2O → Al(OH)3 + NaOH heater
Ignited
2Al(OH)3   → Al2O3 + 3H2O
( autoclave)
Different metallurgical processes can be broadly
divided into three main types.
Gold and silver are also extracted from their native Pyrometallurgy : Extraction is done using heat
ores by Leaching (Mac-Arthur Forrest cyanide energy. The metals like Cu, Fe, Zn, Pb, Sn, Ni, Cr,
process). Both silver and gold particles dissolve in Hg, etc., which are found in nature in the form of
dilute solution of sodium cyanide in presence of oxides, carbonates, sulphides are extracted by this
oxygen of the air forming complex cyanides. process.
4Ag + 8NaCN + 2H2O + O2 Hydrometallurgy : Extraction of metals involving
→ 4NaAg(CN)2 + 4NaOH aqueous solution is known as hydrometallurgy.
Sod. argentocyanide Silver, gold, etc., are extracted by this process.
4Au + 8NaCN + 2H2O + O2 Electrometallurgy : Extraction of highly reactive
metals such as Na, K, Ca, Mg, Al, etc., by carrying
→ 4NaAu(CN)2 + 4NaOH electrolysis of one of the suitable compound in fused
Sod. aurocyanide or molten state.
Ag or Au is recovered from the solution by the
addition of electropositive metal like zinc.

UNDERSTANDING
Physical Chemistry
1. It is possible to supercool water without freezing. 18  263.15 K 
g of water are supercooled to 263.15 K(–10ºC) in a = (36.400 J K–1 mol–1) ×ln  
thermostat held at this temperature, and then  273.15 K 
crystallization takes place. = – 1.358 J K–1 mol–1
Calculate ∆rG for this process. Given: The overall process is obtained by adding Eqs. (1),
Cp(H2O,1) = 75.312 J K–1 mol–1 (2) and (3), i.e.
Cp (H2O,s) = 36.400 J K–1 mol–1 H2O(1, –10ºC) → H2O(s, –10ºC)
∆fusH (at 0ºC) = 6.008 kJ mol–1 The total changes in ∆rH and ∆rS are given by
Sol. The process of crystallization at 0ºC and at 101.325 ∆rH = ∆rH1 + ∆rH2 + ∆rH3
kPa pressure is an equilibrium process, for which =(753.12 – 6008 – 364.0) J mol–1
∆G = 0. The crystallization of supercooled water is a = – 5618.88 J mol–1
spontaneous phase transformation, for which ∆G ∆rS = ∆rS1 + ∆rS2 + ∆rS3
must be less than zero. Its value for this process can
be calculated as shown below. = (2.809 – 21.995 – 1.358) J K–1 mol–1
The given process = – 20.544 J K–1 mol–1
H2O(1, – 10ºC) → H2O(s, –10ºC) Now ∆rG of this process is given by
is replaced by the following reversible steps. ∆rG = ∆rH – T∆rS
= – 5618.88 J mol–1 – (263.15 K)( –20.544 J K–1 mol–1 )
(a) H2O(1, – 10ºC) → H2O(1, 0ºC) ...(1)
273.15 K
= – 212.726 J mol–1
∆rH1 = ∫C
263.15 K
p , m (1) dT 2. From the standard potentials shown in the following
diagram, calculate the potentials E1º and E º2 .
= (75.312 J K–1 mol–1 ) (10 K)
E 1º
= 753.12 J mol–1
273.15K
C p, m (1)
∆rS1 = ∫
263.15K
R
dT
BrO3–
0.54 V
BrO– 0.45 V
1
Br2
1.07 V
2
Br–
 273.15 K  0.17 V
= (75.312 J K–1mol–1) × ln  
 263.15 K  E 2º
= 2.809 J K–1 mol–1
(b) H2O(1, 0ºC) → H2O(s, 0ºC) ...(2) Sol. The reaction corresponding to the potential Eº1 is
∆rH2 = – 6.008 kJ mol–1
1
BrO3– + 3H2O + 5e– = Br2 + 6OH– ...(1)
(6008 J mol –1 ) 2
∆rS2 = – = – 21.995 J K–1 mol–1
(273.15 K ) This reaction can be obtained by adding the
(c) H2O(s, 0ºC) → H2O(s, –10ºC) ...(3) following two reduction reactions:
263.15 K BrO3– + 2H2O + 4e– = BrO– + 4OH– ...(2)
∆rH3 = ∫C
273.15 K
p , m (s) dT 1
BrO– + H2O + e– = Br2 + 2OH–
2
...(3)
= (36.400 J K–1 mol–1)(–10 K) Hence the free energy change of reaction (1) will be
= – 364.0 J mol–1 º
∆G reaction º º
(1) = ∆G reaction ( 2 ) + ∆G reaction (3)
263.15 K
C p, m (s) Replacing ∆Gºs in terms of potentials, we get
∆rS3 = ∫
273.15 K
T
dT
– 5FE1º = – 4F(0.54 V) – 1F (0.45 V)
= (–2.61 V) F

2.61 V 4. Potassium alum is KA1(SO4)2.12H2O. As a strong
Hence E1º = = 0.52 V electrolyte, it is considered to be 100% dissociated
5
into K+, Al3+, and SO42–. The solution is acidic
Now the reaction corresponding to the potential E2º is because of the hydrolysis of Al3+, but not so acidic as
BrO3– + 2H2O + 6e– = Br– + 6OH– ...(4) might be expected, because the SO42– can sponge up
This reaction can be obtained by adding the some of the H3O+ by forming HSO4–. Given a
following three reactions. solution made by dissolving 11.4 g of
KA1(SO4)2.12H2O in enough water to make 0.10 dm3
BrO3– + 2H2O + 4e– = BrO– + 4OH– (Eq.2)
of solution, calculate its [H3O+] :
1 (a) Considering the hydrolysis
BrO– + H2O + e– = Br2 + 2OH– (Eq.3)
2 Al3+ + 2H2O Al(OH)2+ + H3O+
1 with Kh = 1.4 × 10 M–5
Br2 + e– = Br– ...(5)
2 (b) Allowing also for the equilibrium
Hence HSO4– + H2O H3O+ + SO42–
∆G ºreaction ( 4) = ∆G ºreaction ( 2) + ∆G ºreaction (3) with K2 = 1.26 × 10–2 M
11.4 g
+ ∆G ºreaction (5) Sol. (a) Amount of alum = = 0.024 mol
474.38 g mol −1
or – 6F(E2º) = – 4F(0.54 V) – 1F(0.45 V) 0.024 mol
– 1F (1.07 V) Molarity of the prepared solution =
0.1 dm 3
= (– 3.68 V) F
= 0.24 M
3.68 Hydrolysis of Al3+ is
or E2º = = 0.61 V.
6 Al3+ + 2H2O Al(OH)2+ + H3O+
3. What is the solubility of AgCl in 0.20 M NH3 ? [Al(OH) 2 + ][H 3O + ]
Kh =
Given : Ksp(AgCl) = 1.7 × 10–10 M2 [Al3+ ]
K1 = [Ag(NH3)+] / [Ag+] [NH3] = 2.33 × 103 M–1 and If x is the concentration of Al3+ that has hydrolyzed,
K2 = [Ag(NH3)2+]/[Ag(NH3)+][NH3] = 7.14 × 103 M–1 we have
Sol. If x be the concentration of AgCl in the solution, then ( x )( x )
Kh = = 1.4 × 10–5 M
[Cl–] = x 0.24 M − x
From the Ksp for AgCl, we derive Solving for x, we get
K sp 1.7 × 10 −10
M 2 [H3O+] = x = 1.82 × 10–3 M
[Ag+] = =
[Cl ]−
x (b) We will have to consider the following equilibria.
Al3+ + 2H2O Al(OH)2+ + H3O+
If we assume that the majority of the dissolved Ag+ + 2–
goes into solution as Ag(NH3)2+ then [Ag(NH3)2+] = x H3O + SO4 HSO4– + H2O
Since two molecules of NH3 are required for every Let z be the concentration of SO42– that combines
Ag(NH3)2+ ion formed, we have [NH3] = 0.20 M – 2x with H3O+ and y be the net concentration of H3O+
that is present in the solution. Since the concentration
Therefore, z of SO42– combines with the concentration z of
 1.7 × 10 −10 M 2  H3O+, it is obvious that the net concentration of H3O+
 (0.20M − 2x ) 2 produced in the hydrolysis reaction of Al3+ is (y + z).
[Ag + ][ NH 3 ]2  x 
Kinst = =   Thus, the concentration (y + z) of Al3+ out of 0.24 M
[Ag( NH 3 ) +2 ] x hydrolyzes in the solution. With these, the
concentrations of various species in the solution are
= 6.0 × 10–8 M2
From which we derive Al3+ + 2H2O Al(OH) 2+ + H 3O +
0.24 M − y − z y+ z y
2 −8 2
(0.20M − 2 x ) 6.0 × 10 M
= = 3.5 × 10 2
H 3O +
+ SO 24 − HSO −4 + H2O
x2 1.7 × 10 −10 M 2 y 0.48 M − z z
which gives x = [Ag(NH3)2+] = 9.6 × 10–3 M, which ( y + z)( y)

is the solubility of AgCl in 0.20 M NH3 Thus, Kh = = 1.4 × 10–5 M ...(i)
(0.24M − y − z)

z 1
K2 = = ...(ii) CHEMISTRY JOKES
y(0.48M − z) 1.26 × 10 − 2 M
From Eq. (ii), we get Joke 1 :
(0.48 M ) y
z= If you succeeding in guessing the answer to the
(1.26 × 10 − 2 M ) + y previous joke, then you figure out this one:
Substituting this in Eq. (i), we get Q: What is the chemical name of the following
 (0.48M ) y  benzene-like molecule?
y+ y
 (1.26 × 10 M ) + y 
−2 4
 = 1.4 × 10–5
 ( 0 .48 M ) y  \
 0.24 − y − 
 (1.26 × 10 − 2 M ) + y  C - C 4

Making an assumption that y <<1.26 × 10–2 M, and / \ /
then solving for y, we get C C
[H3O+] = y = 2.932 × 10–4 M \ /
C - C
5. The freezing point of an aqueous solution of KCN
containing 0.189 mol kg–1 was – 0.704 ºC. On adding A : Metaphor
0.095 mol of Hg(CN)2, the freezing point of the
solution became –0.530ºC. Assuming that the Joke 2 :
complex is formed according to the equation
Q: What is the name of the molecule bunny-O-
Hg(CN)2 + x CN– → Hg (CN ) xx +– 2 bunny?
Find the formula of the complex. A: An ether bunny
Sol. Molality of the solution containing only KCN is
(–∆Tf ) (0.704 K ) Joke 3 :
m= = –1
= 0.379 mol kg–1
Kf (1.86 K kg mol ) Q: If H-two-O is the formula for water, what is the
This is just double of the given molality formula for ice?
( = 0.189 mol kg–1) of KCN, indicating complete A: H-two-O-CUBED
dissociation of KCN. Molality of the solution after
the formation of the complex
(–∆Tf ) (0.530 K )
Joke 4 :
m= = –1
= 0.285 mol kg–1 Q: What is the chemical symbol for diarrhea?
Kf (1.86 K kg mol )
If it be assumed that the whole of Hg(CN)2 is A: (CO(NH2)2)2
converted into complex, the amounts of various
species in 1 kg of solvent after the formation of the Joke 5 :
complex will be
Q: Why do chemists like nitrates so much?
n(K+) = 0.189 mol,
n(CN–) = (0.189 – x) mol A: They're cheaper than day rates.
n (Hg(CN ) xx +– 2 ) = 0.095 mol

Joke 6 :
Total amount of species in 1 kg solvent becomes
Q: What is the chemical formula for the molecules in
ntotal = [0.189 + (0.189 – x) + 0.095] mol
candy?
= (0.473 – x) mol Equating this to 0.285 mol,
we get A: Carbon-Holmium-Cobalt-Lanthanum-Tellurium
or CHoCoLaTe
(0.473 – x) mol = 0.285 mol
i.e. x = (0.473 – 0.285) = 0.188
Joke 7 :
0.188 mol
Number of CN– units combined = =2 Here is a historical note: In the 1980's, in an effort
0.095 mol
to increase public awareness about the importance
Thus, the formula of the complex is Hg(CN ) 24 – . of chemistry, the American Chemical Society
posted billboards with a picture of C6H10 and the
title, "It takes alkynes to make a world."

Set
`tà{xÅtà|vtÄ V{tÄÄxÇzxá 10
This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing
IIT JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and
we hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Shailendra Maheshwari
So lu t ion s wi l l b e p ub lished in nex t issue Joint Director Academics, Career Point, Kota
1. Let f (x) = sin x and 7. Prove the identity :

{max f (t ); 0 ≤ t ≤ x ; for 0 ≤ x ≤ π x x
∫ ∫
2 2 2
g(x) =  e zx − z dz = e x 4
e−z 4
dz, deriving for the
 sin 2 x / 2 ; x>π 0 0
x
∫
2
Discuss the continuity and differentiability of g(x) in function f (x) = e zx − z dz a differential equation
0
(0, ∞)
and solving it.
2. Is the inequality sin2 x < x sin(sin x) true for
0 < x < π/2 ? Justify your answer. 8. Prove that ∫ sin nθ sec θ dθ
3. A shop sells 6 different flavours of ice-cream. In how
2 cos(n − 1)θ
many ways can a customer choose 4 ice-cream cones
if
=–
n −1 ∫
– sin( n – 2) θ sec θ dθ dθ.
(i) they are all of different flavours; Hence or otherwise evaluate

(ii) they are not necessarily of different flavours; π/2 cos 5θ sin 3θ
(iii) they contain only 3 different flavoures;
∫ 0 cos θ
dθ.
(iv) they contain only 2 or 3 different flavoures ?

9. Find the latus rectum of parabola
4. Using vector method, show that the internal 9x2 – 24 xy + 16y2 – 18x – 101y + 19 = 0.
(external) bisector of any angle of a triangle divides
the opposite side internally (externally) in the ratio of
10. A circle of radius 1 unit touches positive x-axis and
the other two sides containing the triangle.
positive y-axis at A and B respectively. A variable
5. Prove that line passing through origin intersects the circle in two
points in two points D and E. Find the equation of the
(a) cos x + nC1 cos 2x + nC2 cos 3x + ............ lines for which area of ∆ DEB is maximum.
n+2 
...... + nCn cos(n + 1)x = 2n. cosnx/2. cos  x
 2 
(b) sin x + nC1 sin 2x + nC2 sin 3x + ...............
....... + nCn sin(n + 1)x = 2n . cosn x/2 . sin  n + 2 x 
 2 
Behavior
6. In a town with a population of n, a person sands two
• Behavior is a mirror in which everyone displays
letters to two sperate people, each of whom is asked
his image.
to repeat the procedure. Thus, for each letter
received, two letters are sent to separate persons • Behavior is what a man does, not what he thinks,
chosen at random (irrespective of what happened in feels, or believes.
the past). What is the probability that in the first k
• Behave the way you'd like to be and soon you'll
stages, the person who started the chain will not
be the way you behave.
receive a letter ?

MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES
SOLUTION FOR JANUARY ISSUE (SET # 9)
∆ s ( s − a)( s − b)( s − c)
1. as φ (a) = φ (b) = φ (c) so r = k = =
s s
so by Rolle’s theorem there must exist at least a point
x = α & x = β each of intervals (a, c) & (c, b) such s ( s − a)( s − b)( s − c)
r=k=
that φ′(α) = 0 & φ′(β) = 0. Again by Rolle’s theorem, s
there must exist at least a point x = µ such that 2sk = s ( s − a)(a − b + c)(a + b − c)
α < µ < β where φ′(µ) = 0
2 f (a) 2 f (b) = s ( s − a)(a − 2 x)(a + 2 x)
so +
( a − b) ( a − c ) (b − c) (b − a)
2sk = s ( s − a )(a 2 − 4h 2 )
2 f (c )
+ – f ′′ (µ) = 0 required locus is
(c − a ) (c − b ) 4s2y2 = A(a2 – 4x2)
f (a) f (b) Aa 2
so + ⇒ s2y2 + Ax2 =
( a − b) ( a − c ) (b − c) (b − a) 4
f (c ) 1 where A is = s (s – a)
+ = f ′′ (µ) here h2 < as so it is an ellipse
(c − a ) (c − b ) 2
where a < µ < b. 4. f (0) = c
f (1) = a + b + c & f (−1) = a − b + c
2. Required probability solving these,
r −2 1
5 5 5 5 1 5 1 a = [f (1) + f (−1) − 2 f (0)] ,
1. . . ........ . =   . (r – 2) times
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2
Note : any number in 1st loss 1
b = [f (1) − f (−1)] & c = f (0)
same no. does not in 2nd (any other comes). 2
Now 3rd is also diff. (and in same r − 2 times) x( x + 1) x( x − 1)
so f (x) = f (1) + (1− x2) f (0) + f(−1)
Now (r − 1)th & r th must be same. 2 2
2
2 | f (x) | < | x | | x + 1 | + 2| 1 − x | + | x | | x − 1| ;
3. 2s = a + b + c as | f (1) | , | f (0) |, | f (−1) | ≤ 1.
ON = − BN + BO 2 | f (x) | ≤ | x | (x + 1) + 2 (1 − x2) + | x | (1 − x) as
Let BN = x x ∈ [−1, 1]
2BN + 2CN + 2AR = 2s 5 5
x + (a − x) + (b − a + x) = s so 2 | f (x) | ≤ 2 (|x| + 1 − x2) ≤ 2 . so | f (x) | ≤
4 4
x=s−b
2 1
A Now as g (x) = x f (1/x) = (1 + x) f (1)
2
1
+ (x2 − 1) f (0) + (1 − x) f (−1)
2
M R so 2 | g (x) | ≤ | x + 1 | + 2 | 1 − x2 | + | 1 − x|
I (h,k)
⇒ 2 | g (x) | ≤ x + 1 + 2 (1 − x2) | + 1 − x ;
as x ∈ [−1, 1]
r ⇒ 2 | g (x) | < − 2x2 + 4 ≤ 4.
B C ⇒ |g (x) | ≤ 2.
N O
5. Oil bed is being shown by the plane A′ PQ. θ be the
a
so h = ON = − (s − b ) angle between the planes A′ PQ & A′ B′ C′. Let A′ B′
2
C′ be the x − y plane with x-axis along A′ C′ and
−2 s + a + 2b b−c
= = & r = k. origin at A′. The P.V.s of the various points are
2 2 defined as follows

B  5x x
=−2 ∫  sin sin  dx
 2 2
 6x 4x 
A C = ∫  cos
 2
− cos
2 
 dx
B´
= ∫ (cos 3x − cos 2 x) dx
sin 3 x sin 2 x
= − +C
3 2
A´ C´
P x
d2y
Q 7.
dx 2
=2 ∫ f (t ) dt
0
point C′ : b î , point B′ : cos A î + c sin A ĵ ,
integrate using by parts method
point Q : b î – z k̂ , point P : cos A î + c sin A ĵ – y k̂  x x 
dy
normal vector to the plane A′ B′ C′
r dx

∫ 0
∫
= 2  x f (t ) dt − x . f ( x) dx 
 0 

= n1 = bc sin A k̂
r  x 
normal vector to the plane A'PQ = n2
= cz sin A î + (by – cz cos A) ĵ + bc sin A k̂ 
∫
= 2  ( x − t ) f (t ) dt 
0 

r r
n1.n2 again integrating,
so cos θ = r r
| n1 || n1 |  x x x  
y = 2  x ( x − t ) f (t ) dt − x  f (t ) dt − 0  dx 
∫ ∫ ∫
bc sin A    
=  0 0 0  
[c z sin A + (by − cz cos A) 2 + b 2 c 2 sin 2 A]1 / 2
2 2 2
b c sin A  x x2
x x 2
x 
cos θ = 2 2 2
[b c sin A + (c 2 z 2 + b 2 y 2 − 2bycz cos A)]1 / 2  0

∫
=2  x ( x − t ) f (t ) dt −
2
0
f (t ) dt +∫0
2
f ( x) dx 


∫
[c 2 z 2 + b 2 y 2 − 2bycz cos A]1 / 2 x x x
so tan θ =
∫ 2 (x ∫x ∫t
2 2 2
bc sin A = − xt ) f (t ) dt − f (t ) dt + f (t ) dt
0 0 0
z 2 y 2 2 yz x x
so tan θ . sin A = + − cos A
b2 c2 ∫ (x ∫ (x − t)
2 2 2
bc y= − 2 xt + t ) f (t ) dt = f (t ) dt
0 0
cos 8 x − cos 7 x 2 sin 5 x
6. ∫ 1 + 2 cos 5 x
.
2 sin 5 x
dx
  a α 
1/ α
  a β 
1/ β
sin 13 x − sin 3 x − sin 12 x + sin 2 x 8. To prove that    + 1 <    + 1

= ∫ 2 (sin 5 x + sin 10 x)
dx  b 



 b 



a
sin 13 x + sin 2 x − sin 3 x – sin 12 x Let =c> 0
= ∫ 2 (sin 5 x + sin 10 x)
dx b
so (cα + 1)1/α < (cβ + 1)1/β.
15 x 11x 15 x 9x
2 sin cos − 2 sin cos Let f (x) = (cx + 1)1/x ; x > 0
= ∫ 2 2
2 . 2 . sin
15 x
cos
2
5x
2 dx
 1 
f ′(x) = (cx + 1)1/x ln (cx + 1)  − 2 
2 2  x 
11x 9x 1 x 1
cos − cos + (c + 1) x –1. cx ln c
x
= ∫ 2
2 cos
5x
2 dx
1
−1
(c x + 1) x
2 = [−(c x + 1) ln (c x + 1) + c x ln c x ] < 0
x x2
− 2 sin 5 x sin so f (x) is decreasing function
= ∫ 2 cos
5x
2 dx
so f (α) < f (β). Hence proved.
2

9. Point P (x, 1/2) under the given condition are length
PB = OB
(t – 1)
P A
θ
Regents Physics
O C B (t, 1)
You Should Know
rθ = t ; so θ = t
Modern Physics :
PB θ
from ∆PAB : = PA sin • The particle behavior of light is proven by the
2 2
t
⇒ PB = 2 sin ........(1) • A photon is a particle of light {wave packet}.
2
θ t • Large objects have very short wavelengths when
Now ∠ PBC = = ; moving and thus can not be observed behaving
2 2
as a wave. (DeBroglie Waves)
θ t
so from ∠ PCB ; = • All electromagnetic waves originate from
2 2
accelerating charged particles.
1/ 2 t
so from ∆ PCB ; = sin ........(2) • The frequency of a light wave determines its
PB 2
energy (E = hf).
from (1) & (2) PB = 1 ; so θ = t = π/3
• The lowest energy state of a atom is called the
1
thus | PB |2 = (t − x)2 + = 1. ground state.
4
• Increasing light frequency increases the kinetic
3 3 energy of the emitted photo-electrons.
|t−x|= ; t−x= ; as t > x
2 2
• As the threshold frequency increase for a photo-
π 3 cell (photo emissive material) the work function
so x = −
3 2 also increases.
• Increasing light intensity increases the number of
10. Let xn = n − 1 + n + 1 be rational, then emitted photo-electrons but not their KE.
1
=
1
is also rational Mechanics :
xn n −1 + n +1
• Centripetal force and centripetal acceleration
1 n +1 − n −1 vectors are toward the center of the circle- while
= is also rational
xn 2 the velocity vector is tangent to the circle.
• An unbalanced force (object not in equilibrium)
n +1 − n − 1 is also rational
must produce acceleration.
as n +1 + n −1 & n +1 − n − 1 are rational • The slope of the distance-tine graph is velocity.
so n +1 + n − 1 must be rational • The equilibrant force is equal in magnitude but
i.e. (n + 1) & (n – 1) are perfect squares. opposite in direction to the resultant vector.
This is not possible as any two perfect squares differe • Momentum is conserved in all collision systems.
at least by 3. Hence there is not positive integer n for
• Magnitude is a term use to state how large a
which n −1 + n + 1 is a rational. vector quantity is.

Students' Forum Expert’s Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
MATHS
sin 4 α cos 4 α 1 Sol. The greatest integer [x3 + 1] takes jump from 2 to 3 at
1. If + = , show that 3
a b a+b 2 and again from 3 to 4 at 3 3 in [1, 1.5] and
therefore it is discontinuous at these two points. As a
sin 8 α cos 8 α 1
3
+ 3
= . result the given function is discontinuous at 3 2 and
a b ( a + b) 3
hence not differentiable.
a+b a+b To find the derivative at other points we write :
Sol. Here sin4α + cos4α = 1
a b 2
+ sin x
in (1, 3
2 ), f(x) = ( x + 2) x
b 4 a
or sin4α + cos4α + sin α + cos4α = 1 2
+sin x −1
a b ⇒ f ´(x) = ( x + 2) x
or (sin2α + cos2α)2 – 2 sin2α . cos2α {x2 + sin x + (x + 2) (2x + cos x) log (x + 2)}
2
b a in ( 3 2 , 3 3 ), f(x) = ( x + 3) x +sin x
,
+ sin4α + cos4α = 1
a b 2
+sin x −1
2 f ´(x) = ( x + 3) x {x2 + sin x
 b  b a
or  sin 2 α  – 2 . sin2α . cos2α + (2x + cos x) (x + 3) × loge (x + 3)}
 a  a b
  2
+ sin x
in ( 3 5 , 1.5), f(x) = ( x + 4) x ,
2
 a  2
+  cos 2 α  = 0 f ´(x) = ( x + 4) x +sin x −1
, {x2 + sin x + (2x + cos x)
 b 
 
(x + 4) × loge(x + 4)}
2
 b a 
or  sin 2 α – cos 2 α  = 0 3. The decimal parts of the logarithms of two numbers
 a b  taken at random are found to six places of decimal.
 
What is the chance that the second can be subtracted
b a from the first without "borrowing"?
∴ sin2α = cos2α
a b Sol. For each column of the two numbers,
a n(S) = number of ways to fill the two places by the
or sin2α = cos2α digits 0, 1, 2, ... , 9
b
= 10 × 10 = 100.
sin 2 α cos 2 α sin 2 α + cos 2 α
∴ = = x
a b a+b × × × × × ×
y
a b × × × × × ×
∴ sin2α = , cos2α =
a+b a+b Let E be the event of subtracting in a column without
sin 8 α cos8 α 1 a4 1 b4 borrowing. If the pair of digits be (x, y) in the column
∴ + = . + . where x is in the first number and y is in the second
a3 b3 a3 ( a + b) 4 b3 ( a + b) 4 number then
a b a+b 1 E = {(0, 0), (1, 0), (2, 0), .. ,(9, 0),
= + = =
( a + b) 4
( a + b) 4
( a + b) 4
( a + b) 3 (1, 1), (2, 1), ..., (9, 1),
(2, 2), (3, 2), ..., (9, 2),
2. Let [x] stands for the greatest integer function find (3, 3), (4, 3), ..., (9, 3),
2
the derivative of f(x) = ( x + [ x 3 + 1]) x +sin x , where it ......
(8, 8), (9, 8),
exists in (1, 1.5). Indicate the point(s) where it does
not exist. Give reason(s) for your conclusion. (9, 9)}

10.11 Sol. The first traveller travels on different days as follow
∴ n(E) = 10 + 9 + 8 + ... + 2 + 1 = = 55 (in km) 1, 1 + 2, 1 + 2 + 2, ... .
2
After 3 days the first traveller is already ahead by
∴ the probability of subtracting without borrowing
(1 + 3 + 5) km, i.e., 9 km.
55 1 3 5
in each column = .
100
6 6
 55   11 
∴ the required probability =   =   .
 100   20  The second traveller travels on different days as
follows : 0, 0, 0, 12, 13, 14, ...
4. Let S be the coefficients of x49 in given expression After n days from the day the second traveller starts,
f(x) and if P be product of roots of the equation the distance covered by the first
S = 1 + 3 + 5 + (7 + 9 + ... to n terms)
f(x) = 0, then find the value of , given that :
P = 1 + 3 + 5 + ... to (n + 3) terms
 x   1  x  1 = (n + 3)2
f(x) = (x – 1)2  − 2   x −   − 3   x −  , and the distance covered by the second
2  2 3  3
= 12 + 13 + 14 + ... to n terms
 x  1 
.........  − 25   x −  n n(n + 23)
 25  25  = {24 + (n – 1).1} =
2 2
Sol. Here we can write f(x) as : The second traveller is ahead of the first on the nth
 x  x   x  day (after the second sets off) if
f(x) = ( x − 1) − 2  − 3 ... − 25 
 2  3   25  n(n + 23)
> (n + 3)2
2
  1  1  1 
× ( x − 1) x −  x − ... x −  or n2 + 23n > 2(n2 + 6n + 9)
  2  3  25  or n2 – 11n + 18 < 0
Now roots of f(x) = 0 are; or (n – 2) (n – 9) < 0.
1 1 1 So n – 2 > 0 and n – 9 < 0 ...(i)
12, 22, 32, ..... , 252 and 1, , , ....., or n – 2 < 0 and n – 9 > 0 ...(ii)
2 3 25
Now f(x) is the polynomial of degree 50, (i) ⇒ n > 2 and n < 9
So coefficient of x49 will be : (ii) ⇒ n < 2 and n > 0 (absurd)
Thus, from the begining of the 3rd day to the end of
S = – (sum of roots)
the 9th day the second traveller is ahead of the first.
 1 1 1  So, the second is ahead of the first on the 3rd, 4th, 5th,
= – (12 + 22 + ... + 252) – 1 + + + .... + 
 2 3 25  ..., 9th days (after the second sets off).
25 Hence, the required number of days = 7.
 25 × 26 × 51  1
=– 
 6
+ K  where, K =

∑n
n =1
6. Let P(x) be a polynomial of degree n such that
i
⇒ S = –(K + 5525). P(i) = for i = 0, 1, 2 ..... n. If n is odd than find
i +1
Product of roots : the value of P(n + 1).
1 1 1 Sol. Let Q(x) = (x + 1) P(x) – x
12 . 22 . 32 .... 252 . 1 . . .... = 1 . 2 . 3 ...25
2 3 25 clearly Q(x) is polynomial of degree n + 1. Also
∴ P = 25 ! i
Q(i) = (i + 1) – i = 0 for i = 1, 2, 3 .....n
25 i +1
S −(K + 5525) 1
Hence
P
=
25!
, where K = ∑n
n =1
Thus we can assume
Q(x) = kx(x – 1) (x – 2) ...... (x – n) where k is a constant.
Now Q(–1) = k(–1)(–2)(–3) ...... (–1 – n)
5. A traveller starts from a certain place on a certain day 1 = (–1)n + 1 k(n + 1) !
and travels 1 km on the first day and on subsequent 1
days, he travels 2 km more than the previous day. ⇒ k= (Q n is odd)
(n + 1) !
After 3 days, a second traveller sets out from the
same place and on his first day he travels 12 km and 1  x( x − 1)( x − 2)....( x − n) 
on subsequent days he travels 1 km more than the Thus P(x) =  + x ,
x +1  ( x + 1) ! 
previous day. On how many days will the second
traveller be ahead of the first? where n is odd , ∴ P(n + 1) = 1

MATHS
INTEGRATION
Mathematics Fundamentals
Integration : 1 1 x−a
d
18. ∫x 2
−a 2
=
2a
log
x+a
, when x > a
If
dx ∫
f(x) = F(x), then F ( x ) dx = f(x) + c, where c
1 1 a+x
is an arbitrary constant called constant of integration. 19. ∫a 2
−x 2
dx =
2a
log
a−x
, when x < a
x n +1
1. ∫ x n dx =
n +1
(n ≠ –1)
20. ∫
dx x
= log  x + x 2 − a 2  = cos h–1  
 
2
x −a 2 a
1
2. ∫ x
dx = log x
dx x
21. ∫ = log  x + x 2 + a 2  = sin h–1  
 
∫e a
2 2
3. x
dx = ex x +a
1 1 x
4. ∫ a x dx =
ax
log e a
22. ∫ a 2 − x 2 dx =
2
x a 2 − x 2 + a2 sin–1  
2 a
1
5. ∫ sin x dx = – cos x 23. ∫ x 2 − a 2 dx =
2
x x2 − a2
6. ∫ cos x dx = sin x –
1 2 
2
a log  x + x 2 − a 2 
 
∫ sec x dx = tan x
2
7. 1
24. ∫ x 2 + a 2 dx =
2
x x2 + a2
∫ cos ec x dx = – cot x
2
8.
1 2
+ a log  x + x 2 + a 2 
9. ∫ sec x tan x dx = sec x 2  
f ´(x )
10. ∫ cosec x cot x dx = – cosec x
25. ∫ f ( x) dx = log f(x)
x π f ´(x)
11. ∫ sec x dx = log(sec x + tan x) = log tan  2 + 4  26. ∫ f ( x)
dx = 2 f ( x)
 x Integration by Decomposition into Sum :

12. ∫ cosec x dx = – log (cosec x + cot x) = log tan  2  1. Trigonometrical transformations : For the
integrations of the trigonometrical products such as
13. ∫ tan x dx = – log cos x sin2x, cos2x, sin3x, cos3x, sin ax cos bx, etc., they are
expressed as the sum or difference of the sines and
14. ∫ cot x dx = log sin x cosines of multiples of angles.
2. Partial fractions : If the given function is in the
dx x x
∫ a − x = sin a = – cos
–1 –1 form of fractions of two polynomials, then for its
15.
2 2 a integration, decompose it into partial fractions (if
possible).
dx 1 x 1 x
16. ∫a 2
+x 2
= tan–1 = – cot–1  
a a a a
Integration of some special integrals :
dx
dx 1 x 1  x (i) ∫
∫x
2
17. = sec–1 = – cosec–1   ax + bx + c
x −a2 2 a a a a This may be reduced to one of the forms of the above
formulae (16), (18) or (19).

dx dx 1
(ii) ∫
ax + bx + c 2
4. ∫ ( px 2
+ r ) ax + c2
, at first x =
t
and then a + ct2 = z2
This can be reduced to one of the forms of the above Some Important Integrals :
formulae (15), (20) or (21).
dx  x−α
(iii) ∫ ax 2 + bx + c dx 1. To evaluate ∫ ( x − α)( x − β)
, ∫   dx,
 β− x 
This can be reduced to one of the forms of the above
formulae (22), (23) or (24). ∫ ( x − α)(β − x) dx. Put x = α cos2θ + β sin2θ
( px + q)dx ( px + q )dx
(iv) ∫ 2
ax + bx + c
, ∫
ax 2 + bx + c
2. To evaluate
dx
∫ a + b cos x , ∫ a + b sin x ,
dx
For the evaluation of any of these integrals, put dx

px + q = A {differentiation of (ax2 + bx + c)} + B ∫ a + b cos x + c sin x
Find A and B by comparing the coefficients of like
powers of x on the two sides.  x  2 x
 2 tan  1 − tan 
2 2
1. If k is a constant, then Replace sin x =  and cos x = 
 2 x  x
∫ k dx = kx and ∫ k f ( x) dx = k ∫ f ( x) dx
2
1 + tan  1 + tan 
 2  2
2. ∫{ f ( x) ± f ( x)} dx = ∫ f ( x) dx ± ∫ f ( x) dx
1 2 1 2
Then put tan
x
= t.
2
Some Proper Substitutions :
p cos x + q sin x
1. ∫ f(ax + b) dx, ax + b = t 3. To evaluate ∫
a + b cos x + c sin x
dx
Put p cos x + q sin x = A(a + b cos x + c sin x)

∫ f(ax + b)x dx, ax + b = t
n n–1 n
2.
+ B. diff. of (a + b cos x + c sin x) + C
3. ∫ f{φ(x)} φ´(x) dx, φ(x) = t A, B and C can be calculated by equating the
coefficients of cos x, sin x and the constant terms.
f ´(x)
4. ∫ f ( x) dx , f(x) = t 4. To evaluate ∫ a cos 2
dx
,
x + 2b sin x cos x + c sin 2 x
5. ∫ a 2 − x 2 dx, x = a sin θ or a cos θ
∫ a cos
dx
2
x+b
,
dx
∫
a + b sin 2 x
∫
2 2
6. a + x dx, x = a tan θ In the above type of questions divide Nr and Dr by
cos2x. The numerator will become sec2x and in the
a2 − x2 denominator we will have a quadratic equation in tan
7. ∫ a2 + x2
dx, x2 = a2 cos 2θ x (change sec2x into 1 + tan2x).
Putting tan x = t the question will reduce to the form
8. ∫ a ± x dx, a ± x = t2 dt
a−x
∫ at 2 + bt + c
9. ∫ a+x
dx, x = a cos 2θ 5. Integration of rational function of the given form
x2 + a2 x2 − a2
10. ∫ 2ax − x 2 dx, x = a(1 – cos θ) (i) ∫x 4 + kx 2 + a 4
dx, (ii) ∫
x 4 + kx 2 + a 4
dx, where
k is a constant, positive, negative or zero.

11. ∫ x 2 − a 2 dx, x = a sec θ
These integrals can be obtained by dividing
Substitution for Some irrational Functions : numerator and denominator by x2, then putting
dx a2 a2
1. ∫( px + q) ax + b
, ax + b = t2 x–
x
= t and x +
x
= t respectively.
dx 1 Integration of Product of Two Functions :

2. ∫ ( px + q) , px + q =
∫ f (x) f (x) dx = f (x) ∫ f (x) dx – ∫ [( f ( x)∫ f ( x)dx] dx

2
ax + bx + c t '
1. 1 2 1 2 1 2
dx
∫ ( px
2
3. 2
, ax + b = t Proper choice of the first and second functions :
+ qx + r ) ax + b
Integration with the help of the above rule is called

integration by parts, In the above rule, there are two x
terms on R.H.S. and in both the terms integral of the convenient to make the substitution cot = t for
2
second function is involve. Therefore in the product 0 < x < 2π.
of two functions if one of the two functions is not
directly integrable (e.g. log x, sin–1x, cos–1x, tan–1x The above substitution enables us to integrate any
etc.) we take it as the first function and the remaining function of the form R (sin x, cos x). However, in
function is taken as the second function. If there is no practice, it sometimes leads to extremely complex
other function, then unity is taken as the second rational functions. In some cases, the integral can be
function. If in the integral both the functions are simplified by –
easily integrable, then the first function is chosen in (i) Substituting sin x = t, if the integral is of the form
such a way that the derivative of the function is a
simple functions and the function thus obtained under ∫ R (sin x) cos x dx.
the integral sign is easily integrable than the original (ii) Substituting cos x = t, if the integral is of the form
function.
∫ R (cos x) sin x dx.
2. ∫ e ax sin(bx + c) dx
dt
(iii) Substituting tan x = t, i.e. dx = , if the
e ax
1+ t2
= 2 [a sin (bx + c) – b cos (bx + c)] integral is dependent only on tan x.
a + b2
Some Useful Integrals :
e ax  b
= sin bx + c − tan −1  dx
2
a +b 2 a 1. (When a > b) ∫
a + b cos x
∫e
ax
3. cos(bx + c) dx 2  a−b x
= tan–1  tan  + c
2
a −b 2
 a + b 2 
e ax
= [a cos (bx + c) + b sin(bx + c)]
a 2 + b2 dx
2. (When a < b) ∫ a + b cos x
e ax  b
= cos bx + c − tan −1  x
2
a +b 2 a b − a tan − a+b
1 a
=– log
x
4. ∫ ekx{kf(x) + f '(x)} dx = ekxf(x) b2 − a 2 b − a tan + a + b
a
 x dx 1 x
5. ∫ log e x = x(logex – 1) = x loge  
e
3. (when a = b) ∫ a + b cos x = a tan 2 +c
Integration of Trigonometric Functions : dx

1. To evaluate the integrals of the form
4. (When a > b) ∫ a + b sin x
 
∫ sin x cos x dx, where m and n are rational x
m n
I =
 a tan 2  + b 
2    
numbers. = tan–1   +c
2 2
a 2 − b2  a −b 
(i) Substitute sin x = t, if n is odd;  
(ii) Substitute cos x = t, if m is odd;
dx
(iii) Substitute tan x = t, if m + n is a negative even
integer; and
5. (When a < b) ∫ a + b sin x
1 1  x
(iv) Substitute cot x = t, if (m + 1) + (n – 1) is an a tan   + b − b 2 − a 2
2 2 1 2
= log +c
integer. b2 − a 2  x
a tan   + b + b 2 − a 2
2
2. Integrals of the form ∫ R (sin x, cos x) dx, where R is dx 1
a rational function of sin x and cos x, are transformed
into integrals of a rational function by the substitution
6. (When a = b) ∫ a + b sin x = a [tan x – sec x] + c
x
tan = t, where –π < x < π. This is the so called
2
universal substitution. Sometimes it is more

MATHS
TRIGONOMETRICAL
EQUATION
Mathematics Fundamentals
Functions with their Periods : checked whether they satisfy the original equation
or not. e.g. Let x = 3. Squaring, we get x2 = 9,
Function Period ∴ x = 3 and – 3 but x = – 3 does not satisfy the
sin (ax + b), cos (ax + b), sec (ax + b), 2π/a original equation x = 3.
cosec (ax + b)
2. Any value of x which makes both R.H.S. and
tan(ax + b), cot (ax + b) π/a L.H.S. equal will be a root but the value of x for
|sin (ax + b)|, |cos (ax + b)|, |sec (ax + b)|, π/a which ∞ = ∞ will not be a solution as it is an
|cosec (ax + b)| indeterminate form.
|tan (ax + b)|, |cot (ax + b)| π/2a 3. If xy = xz, then x(y – z) = 0 ⇒ either x = 0 or
y z
Trigonometrical Equations with their General y = z or both. But = ⇒ y = z only and not
Solution: x x
x = 0, as it will make ∞ = ∞. Similarly, if ay = az,
Trgonometrical equation General Solution then it will also imply y = z only as a ≠ 0 being a
sin θ = 0 θ = nπ constant.
cos θ = 0 θ = nπ + π/2 Similarly, x + y = x + z ⇒ y = z and x – y = x – z
tan θ = 0 θ = nπ
⇒ y = z. Here we do not take x = 0 as in the
above because x is an additive factor and not
sin θ = 1 θ = 2nπ + π/2 multiplicative factor.
cos θ = 1 θ = 2nπ
4. When cos θ = 0, then sin θ = 1 or –1. We have to
sin θ = sin α θ = nπ + (–1) αn verify which value of sin θ is to be chosen which
 1
cos θ = cos α θ = 2nπ ± α satisfies the equation cos θ = 0 ⇒ θ =  n +  π
 2
tan θ = tan α θ = nπ + α
If sin θ = 1, then obviously n = even. But if
sin2θ = sin2α θ = nπ ± α sin θ = –1, then n = odd.
tan2θ = tan2α θ = nπ ± α Similarly, when sin θ = 0, then θ = nπ and cos θ = 1
or –1.
cos2θ = cos2α θ = nπ ± α
If cos θ = 1, then n is even and if cos θ = –1, then
sin θ = sin α θ = 2nπ + α n is odd.
*
cos θ = cos α 5. The equations a cos θ ± b sin θ = c are solved as
follows :
sin θ = sin α θ = 2nπ + α
*
tan θ = tan α Put a = r cos α, b = r sin α so that r = a2 + b2
and α = tan–1 b/a.
tan θ = tan α θ = 2nπ + α
* The given equation becomes
cos θ = cos α
r[cos θ cos α ± sin θ sin α] = c ;
* If α be the least positive value of θ which satisfy c c
cos (θ ± α) = provided ≤ 1.
two given trigonometrical equations, then the general r r
value of θ will be 2nπ + α.
Relation between the sides and the angle of a triangle:
Note :
1. Sine formula :
1. If while solving an equation we have to square it,
then the roots found after squaring must be

sin A sin B sin C 1 Some Important Results :
= = =
a b c 2R A B s−c A B s
1. tan tan = ∴ cot cot =
Where R is the radius of circumcircle of triangle 2 2 s 2 2 s−c
ABC. A B c C c
2. Cosine formulae : 2. tan + tan = cot = (s – c)
2 2 s 2 ∆
b2 + c2 − a2 a2 + c2 − b2 A B a −b
cos A = , cos B = , 3. tan – tan = (s – c)
2bc 2ac 2 2 ∆
a 2 + b2 − c2 A B
cos C = tan + tan
2ab A B 2 2 = c cot C
4. cot + cot =
It should be remembered that, in a triangle ABC 2 2 A B s−c 2
tan tan
If ∠A = 60º, then b2 + c2 – a2 = bc 2 2
If ∠B = 60º, then a2 + c2 – b2 = ac 5. Also note the following identities :
If ∠C = 60º, then a2 + b2 – c2 = ab Σ(p – q) = (p – q) + (q – r) + (r – p) = 0
3. Projection formulae : Σp(q – r) = p(q – r) + q(r – p) + r(p – q) = 0
a = b cos C + c cos B, b = c cos A + a cos C Σ(p + a)(q – r) = Σp(q – r) + aΣ(q – r) = 0
c = a cos B + b cos A Solution of Triangles :
Trigonometrical Ratios of the Half Angles of a Triangle: 1. Introduction : In a triangle, there are six
a+b+c elements viz. three sides and three angles. In
If s = in triangle ABC, where a, b and c are
2 plane geometry we have done that if three of the
the lengths of sides of ∆ABC, then elements are given, at least one of which must be
a side, then the other three elements can be
A s( s − a) B s ( s − b) uniquely determined. The procedure of
(a) cos = , cos = ,
2 bc 2 ac determining unknown elements from the known
C s( s − c) elements is called solving a triangle.
cos = 2. Solution of a right angled triangle :
2 ab
Case I. When two sides are given : Let the
A ( s − b)( s − c) B ( s − a)( s − c ) triangle be right angled at C. Then we can
(b) sin = , sin = ,
2 bc 2 ac determine the remaining elements as given in the
following table.
C ( s − a )( s − b)
sin =
2 ab Given Required
A ( s − b)( s − c) (i) a, b a a
(c) tan = , tanA = , B = 90º – A, c =
2 s( s − a) b sin A
(ii) a, c a
B ( s − a)( s − c) C ( s − a)( s − b) sinA = , b = c cos A, B = 90º – A
tan = , tan c
2 s ( s − b) 2 s( s − c)
Napier's Analogy : Case II. When a side and an acute angle are given –
B −C b−c A C−A c−a B In this case, we can determine
tan = cot , tan = cot
2 b+c 2 2 c+a 2
Given Required
A− B a −b C
tan = cot (i) a, A
2 a+b 2 a
B = 90º – A, b = a cot A, c =
Area of Triangle : sin A
1 1 1 (ii) c, A B = 90º – A, a = c sin A, b = c cos A
∆ = bc sin A= ca sin B = ab sin C
2 2 2
2 2 2
∆ = 1 a sin B sin C = 1 b sin C sin A = 1 c sin A sin B
2 sin( B + C ) 2 sin(C + A) 2 sin( A + B)
2 2∆
sin A = s ( s − a)( s − b)( s − c ) =
bc bc
2∆ 2∆
Similarly sin B = & sin C =
ca ab

Based on New Pattern
a
IIT-JEE 2012
XtraEdge Test Series # 10
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
Section - I
• Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
• Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and –1 mark for wrong answer.
• Question 14 to 19 are passage based questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong
answer.
• Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer (i.e. +1 marks for each correct row) and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
(A) 6 mm (B) 8 mm (C) 4 3 mm (D) 2 3 mm

PHYSICS
3. A black body emits radiation at the rate P when its
Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each temperature is T. At this temperature the wavelength
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of at which the radiation has maximum intensity is λ0. If
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in at another temperature T' the power radiated is P' &
OMR sheet against the question number of that λ
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct wavelength at maximum intensity is 0 then –
2
answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer.
(A) P'T' = 32 PT (B) P'T' = 16 PT
1. In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal, with
(C) P'T' = 8 PT (D) P'T' = 4 PT
e.m.f. = 15 V. Each resistance is of 3Ω. The potential
difference across the capacitors in steady state – 4. If two identical string are stretched such that there is
R=3Ω C=3µF fractional increase in their length, the fractional
increase in length of first string is f and second string
is 2f. Then the ratio of their fundamental frequency
R R
is. (Assume both obey the Hook Law i.e. tension ∝
elongation in string) -
R R
1 1 + 2f 1 + 2f
+ – (A) (B) 2
2 1+ f 1+ f
15V
(A) 0 (B) 9 V (C) 12 V (D) 15 V 1 1+ f 1+ f
(C) (D)
2 1 + 2f 1 + 2f
2. In a young double slit apparatus the screen is rotated
by 60º about an axis parallel to the slits. The slits 5. A infinite line charge of charge density λ lies along
separation is 3mm, slits to screen distance (i.e AB) is 4 the x axis and let the surface of zero potential passes
m & wavelength of light is 450 nm. The separation through (0, 5, 12) m. The potential at point
between the 3rd dark fringe on the either side of B. (2, 3, –4) is –
z
screen
60º V=0
A B
(0,5,12)
y

λ 13 2λ 13 This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(A) ln (B) ln (Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
2πε 0 5 π ε0 3
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
λ 13 λ 13 has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
(C) ln (D) ln
4π ε 0 5 π ε0 3 ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
6. A satellite is put in an orbit just above the earth will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
atmosphere with a velocity 1.5 times the velocity
The following questions given below consist of an
for a circular orbit at that height. The initial velocity "Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type questions. Use
imparted is horizontal. What would be the maximum the following Key to choose the appropriate answer.
distance of satellite from earth when it is in the orbit- (A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
(A) 3R (B) 4R (C) 2 R (D) 5 R explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
7. The density of a uniform rod with cross section area correct explanation of (A).
A is ρ, its specific heat capacity is C and the (C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
coefficient of its linear expansion is α. Calculate the (D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.
amount of heat that should be added in order to 10. Assertion (A) : As the earth revolves around the sun
increase the length of the rod by ∆l. it has an acceleration which is directed towards
2AρC∆l AρCα centre of the sun.
(A) (B) Reason (R) : Angular momentum of the earth about
α ∆l
the sun remains constant.
AρC∆l ρC∆l
(C) (D)
α 2Aα 11. Assertion (A) : In electric circuits , wires carrying
currents in opposite direction are often twisted
together.
8. For the system shown each spring has a stiffness of
175 N/m. The mass of the pulleys may be neglected. Reason (R) : The magnetic field in the surrounding
The period of vertical oscillation of block – (mass of space of a twisted wire system in not precisely zero.
block is 28 kg) 12. Assertion (A) : A metal ball is floating in mercury.
Coefficient of volume expansion of metal is less than
that of mercury. If temperature is increased, fraction
k k of volume immersed of metal will increase.
Reason (R) : Effect of heating on density of mercury
will be more compared to that of metal.
fricationless 13. Assertion (A) : Work done by static friction is

Block surface always zero.
28 kg Reason (R) : Static friction acts when there is no
relative motion between two bodies in contact.
π π
(A) 2 s (B) π 2 s (C) s (D) 2s This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
5 5 choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
9. A uniform elastic rod of cross section area A, natural has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
length L and young modulus Y is placed on a smooth ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
horizontal surface. Now two horizontal force (of against the question number of that question. +4 marks
magnitude F and 3F) directed along the length of rod will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
and in opposite direction act at two of its ends as each wrong answer.
shown. After the rod has acquired steady state (i.e. no Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
further extension take place), the extension of the rod
A conducting rod PQ of mass M rotates without
will be –
friction on a horizontal plane about Ο on circular
Elastic rod
F 3F rails of diameter 'l'. The centre O and the periphery
are connected by resistance R. The system is located
2F 4F in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the
(A) L (B) L plane of the loop. At t = 0, PQ starts rotating
YA YA
clockwise with angular velocity ω0. Neglect the
F 3F resistance of the rails and rod, as well as self
(C) L (D) L
YA 2YA inductance.

This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
⊗B Q
Each question contains statements given in two columns
which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in
O ω0 Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S)
P in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be
R
appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following
example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R,
C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4
matrix should be as follows :
14. Magnitude of current as a function of time P Q R S
Bω0 l 2 −αt Bω0l 2 −2αt A P Q R S
(A) e (B) e
2R 16R B P Q R S
Bω0 l 2 −αt Bω0l 2 −2αt C P Q R S
(C) e (D) e
8R 8R D P Q R S
3B2l 2 Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
Where α =
8RM number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
15. Total charge flow through resistance till rod PQ stop
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
rotating .
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
ωM ωM ωM ωM
(A) 0 (B) 0 (C) 0 (D) 0 20. A charged particle passes through a region that could
8B 3B 6B 9B
have electric field only or magnetic field only or both
16. Heat generated in the circuit by t = ∞ electric and magnetic field or none of the fields.
Match the possibilities
Ml 2ω02 Ml 2ω02 Ml 2ω02 Ml 2ω02
(A) (B) (C) (D) Column-I
24 8 3 32
(A) Kinetic energy of the particle remain constant.
Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19) (B) Acceleration of the particle is zero
A cylindrical spool of radius R is rigidly attached to a (C) Kinetic energy of the particle changes and it also
pulley of radius 2R. The mass of the combination is suffers deflection
m and the radius of gyration about the centroidal axis
(D) Kinetic energy of the particle changes but it
G is R. A constant horizontal force F is applied at
suffers no deflection
one end of the tape. Assume rolling motion between
the pulley and the ground. I is the moment of inertia Column-II
about centroidal axis. (P) Under special condition this is possible when
both electric and magnetic fields are present
2R
(Q) The region has electric field
G (R) The region has magnetic field only
R (S) The region contains no field
F
P
21. Match the column :
17. The acceleration of point P on the tape relative to the Column-I
ground is - Phenomena on which machine work
F F F F (A) Electromagnetic induction
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2m 5m 3m 4m (B) Light of suitable frequency falling on a material
18. The length of the tape wound/unwound on the spool result in emissions of electrons from the material
in time t is - (C) Change of orientation of a coil in a magnetic
Ft 2 Ft 2 Ft 2 Ft 2 field results in e.m.f. across the coil
(A) (B) (C) (D) (D) Mutual induction
10 m 5m 4m 2m
Column-II
19. The linear acceleration of centre G is - Machine or instrument
2FR 2 2FR 2 (P) Photocell
(A) (B)
I I + mR 2 (Q) DC motor
(R) AC generator
2FR 2 2FR 2
(C) (D) (S) Transformer
I + 2mR 2 I + 4mR 2

22. Match the column : (A) phenolphthalein and methyl orange
Column-I (B) methyl orange and phenolphthalein
(A) A photon stimulates the emission of another (C) methyl orange and phenol red
photon of (D) phenolphthalein and phenol red.
(B) Photons of electromagnetic wave of different
wavelengths may have 3. Metallic sulphates can be obtained by reacting the
(C) Two points on a wavefront must have metals (above hydrogen in ECS), or its oxide,
hydroxide or carbonate with dil.H2SO4. Gp IA
(D) For constructive interference the waves must metals also form hydrogen sulphates which can be
have isolated in solid. In general metal sulphates are
Column-II soluble in water and crystallizes with water of
(P) Same direction crystallization. Sulphate are thermally more stable
(Q) Same energy than nitrates. Select the stable hydrogen sulphate
(R) Same phase which can be obtained in solid state -
(S) Same frequency (A) KHSO4 (B) CaHSO4
(C) FeHSO4 (D) All of these
CHEMISTRY 4. Which of the following represent glyptal -

O O
Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of (A) ––O–CH2–CH2–O–C C–––
4
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that O O
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct (B) ––NH–(CH2)6–NH–C––(CH2)4–C–––
answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer. 4
1. The phenomenon of optical activity will be shown by - O O
A A (C) O
O 4
B B A
(A) M (B) M en O
B B B (D) N
A B 4
en H
A
B
(C) en (D) 5. In the Cannizzaro's reaction given below :
M en M –
2Ph – CHO OH → Ph–CH2OH + PhCOO–-
B
A en the slowest step is -
2. Titration curve of Na2CO3 and HCl is as given below. (A) the attack of OH– at the carbonyl group
The indicators In1 and In2 respectively, must be – (B) the transfer of hydride to the carbonyl group
(C) the abstraction of proton from the carboxylic acid
(D) the deprotonation of Ph–CH2OH
12
6. The relative rates of solvolysis in 80% EtOH of the
10 In1 following bromides is in the order –
pH 6
Br Br Br
In2
4 I II III
(A) I > II > III (B) III > II > I
2
(C) II > III > I (D) II > I > III
10 20 30 40 50 60
Volume of HCl (ml)

CAREER POINT
Correspondence & Test Series Courses Information
Courses of IIT-JEE
For Class 12th/ 12th Pass Students For Class 11th Students
COURSE → All India
All India Test Postal Major Test Study Postal All
Study Material Postal All India Major Test Series CP Ranker's Foundation
INFORMATION Series Series Material India Test
Package Test Series IIT-JEE 2012 Package Test Series IIT-
IIT-JEE 2012 IIT-JEE 2012 Package Series
↓ IIT-JEE 2012 IIT-JEE 2012 (At Center) IIT-JEE 2012 JEE 2013
(At Center) (By Post) IIT-JEE 2013 IIT-JEE 2013
(At Center)
Eligibility for Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 11th Class 11th Class 11th
Admission Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Students Students Students
Medium English or Hindi English English English English English English or Hindi English English
visit our website or visit our website or visit our website

Test Center Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal
contact us contact us or contact us
Issue of Application Immediate Immediate Immediate

Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch Immediate Dispatch
Kit Dispatch Dispatch Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/ 15 Jan 2012 15 Jan 2012 Immediate 15 Aug 11 15 Aug 11
Immediate Dispatch 15 Aug 11 onwards 15 Aug 11 onwards Immediate Dispatch
First Test onwards onwards Dispatch onwards onwards
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800 4500 2500
Courses of AIEEE
For Class 11th
For Class 12th/ 12th Pass Students
COURSE → Students
All India Test Postal Major Test Study
Study Material Postal All India Major Test Series CP Ranker's
INFORMATION Series Series Material
Package Test Series AIEEE 2012 Package
↓ AIEEE 2012 AIEEE 2012 Package
AIEEE 2012 AIEEE 2012 (At Center) AIEEE 2012
(At Center) (By Post) AIEEE 2013
Eligibility for Class 12th or 12th Pass Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 11th
Admission Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Students
Medium English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi
visit our website or visit our website or

Test Center Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal
contact us contact us
Issue of Immediate
Application Kit Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/ 15 Jan 2012 15 Jan 2012 Immediate
First Test onwards onwards Dispatch
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800
Courses of Pre-Medical
For Class 12th/ 12th Pass Students For Class 11th Students
COURSE → All India

All India Test Postal Major Test Study Postal All
Study Material Postal All India Major Test Series CP Ranker's Foundation
INFORMATION Series Series Material India Test
Package Test Series AIPMT 2012 Package Test Series
AIPMT 2012 AIPMT 2012 Package Series
↓ AIPMT 2012 AIPMT 2012 (At Center) AIPMT 2012 AIPMT 2013
(At Center) (By Post) AIPMT 2013 AIPMT 2013
(At Center)
Eligibility for Class 12th or 12th Pass Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 12th or 12th Class 11th Class 11th Class 11th
Admission Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Pass Students Students Students Students
Medium English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English or Hindi English English English or Hindi English English
visit our website or visit our website or visit our website

Test Center Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal
contact us contact us or contact us
Issue of Application Immediate Immediate Immediate

Kit Dispatch Dispatch Dispatch
Date of Dispatch/ 15 Jan 2012 15 Jan 2012 Immediate 15 Aug 11 15 Aug 11
First Test onwards onwards Dispatch onwards onwards
Course Fee 9000 3600 1500 1000 700 900 9800 4500 2500
• For details about all correspondence & test Series Course Information, Please visit our website.: www.careerpointgroup.com

7. NaOH can be prepared by two methods each of the 11. Assertion (A) : For adsorption ∆G, ∆S and ∆H all have
method has two steps having 100% yield. negative values.
Method I : 2Na + 2H2O → 2NaOH + H2 Reason (R) : Adsorption is spontaneous process
2H2 + O2 → 2H2O accompained by increase in entropy.
1 12. Assertion (A) : For the concentration cell,
Method II : 2Na + O2 → Na2O
2 Zn(s) | Zn2+ (aq)(C1) | | Zn2+ (aq) (C2)/Zn, for
Na2O + H2O → 2NaOH spontaneous cell reaction C1 < C2.
Which of the above method gives better yield of RT C 2
Reason (R) : For concentration cell,Ecell = ln
NaOH ? nF C1
(A) Method I
For spontaneous reaction, Ecell +ve ⇒ C2 > C1
(B) Method II
(C) Method I & Method II give equal yields. 13. Assertion (A) : Aryl halides undergo nucleophilic
(D) Yield cannot be determined substitution with ease.
Reason (R) : Carbon-halogen bond in aryl halides
8. Which of the following value θ is correspond to the has partial double bond character.
maximum dipole moment of the triatomic molecule
This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
XY2
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
Y has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
θ ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
X Y will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
(A) θ = 90º (B) θ = 120º (C) θ = 150º (D) 180º
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
9. Photons having energy equivalent to binding energy
of 2nd state of Li+ ion are used at metal surface of FeCl3 on reaction with K4 [Fe(CN)6] in aqueous
work function 10.6 eV. If the ejected electrons are solution gives blue colour, according the
further accelerated through the potential difference of equation
5 V then the minimum value of de-Broglie 4FeCl3 + 3K4[Fe(CN)6] → Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3 + 12 KCl
wavelength associated with the electron is – At 300 K two aqueous solution of K4[Fe(CN)6] &
(A) 2.45 Å (B) 9.15 Å (C) 5 Å (D) 11 Å FeCl3 with equal concentrations 0.1 M. These two
This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13, solutions are separated by a semipermeable
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question membrane AB as shown in figure.
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question A
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY 0.1M 0.1M
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks K4[Fe(CN)6] FeCl3
will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
each wrong answer. side'x' side'y'
B
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type questions. Use
the following Key to choose the appropriate answer. 14. What is correct –
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct (A) side ‘x’ is hypotonic
explanation of (A). (B) side ‘y’ is hypotonic
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the (C) both are isotonic
correct explanation of (A). (D) None of these
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false. 15. What is true about the solutions –
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true. (A) blue colour forms in side ‘x’
10. Assertion (A) : (B) blue colour forms in side ‘y’
O O (C) blue colour forms on both sides
is a macrocyclic ligand (D) No blue colour formation
N N
O O
16. By applying external pressure osmosis can be
O stopped it should be applied to –
O (A) side ‘x’ (B) side ‘y’
Reason (R) : The ligand in which donor atoms are N (C) equal on both the sides
and O is known a cryptands.
(D) can not be stopped by applying external pressure

Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19) 19. Reactivity in halogen substituted benzene rings is
An activating group activates all positions of the controlled by :
benzene ring; even the positions meta to it are more (A) resonance
reactive than any single position in benzene itself. It (B) inductive effect
directs ortho and para simply because it activates the (C) inductive effect dominates resonance effect
ortho and para positions much more than it does the
(D) resonance effect dominates inductive effect
meta.
A deactivating group deactivates all positions in the This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
ring, even the positions meta to it. It directs meta Each question contains statements given in two columns
simply because it deactivates the ortho and para which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in
positions even more than it does the meta. Thus, both Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S)
ortho and para orientation and meta orientation arise in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be
in the same way : The effect of any group whether appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following
activating or deactivating is strongest at the ortho and example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R,
para positions. C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4
But certain groups (– NH2 and – OH, and their matrix should be as follows :
derivatives) act as powerful activators towards P Q R S
electrophilic aromatic substitution, even though they
contain electronegative atoms and can be shown in A P Q R S
other ways to have electron-withdrawing inductive B P Q R S
effects. C P Q R S
Halogens are unusual in their effect on electrophilic D P Q R S
aromatic substitution; they are deactivating yet ortho,
para-directing. Deactivation is characteristic of Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
electron withdrawal, whereas ortho-para orientation number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
is characteristic of electron release. given for complete correct answer and No Negative
17. Which will undergo Friedel-Crafts alkylation marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
reaction? given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
CH3 CH2CH3 20. One mole of an ideal gas is subjected to the following
process :
(1) (2) Column-I Column-II
(A) ∆W = 0 (P) If the gas undergoes
NO2 free expansion
COOH OH (B) ∆E = 75Cv (Q) If the gas is cooled
reversibly at constant
(3) (4)
pressure from 373 K
to 298 K
(A) 1, 2 and 4 (B) 1 and 3 (C) ∆H = –75 Cp (R) If the gas is heated
(C) 2 and 4 (D) 1 and 2 from 298 K to 373 K
reversively at constant
18. Which of the following is the strongest acid ? pressure
OH
(D) ∆W = –75 R (S) If the gas is heated
OH from 298 K to 373 K at
(A) (B)
constant volume
NO2
Cl 21. Match the Column :
OH OH Column-I Column-II
(Gases X and Y (Tatio of times
(C) (D) taken of diffusion) taken)
NO2 (A) X = 100 ml of H2 at 1 bar, 25º C (P) 1 : 1225
NO2 Y = 200 ml of O2 at 2 bar, 25ºC
(B) X = 100 ml of O2 at 1 bar, 25ºC (Q) 1 : 0.7
Y = 200 ml of O3 at 2 bar, 25ºC

(C) X = 100 ml of SO2 at 1 bar, 25ºC (R) 1 : 1.36  2 x − [ x] 
Y = 100 ml of O2 at 1 bar, 25ºC 6. Domain of f (x) = sin −1   , where [.] denotes
 [ x] 
(D) X = HCl gas to travel 100 cm (S) 1 : 8 the greatest integer function, is
length in a tube
 4 
Y = NH3 gas to travel 200 cm (A) (–∞, 1) – {0} (B) − , 0  ∪ {0}
length using the same tube  3 
(P, V, T) = same in both cases) (C) (–∞, 0) ∪ I+ (D) (–∞, ∞) – [0, 1)
22. Match the Column : 7. The number of different words of three letters which
Column-I Column-II can be formed from the word "PROPOSAL", if a
(A) Soluble in dil HCl (P) SrS2O3 vowel is always in the middle are-
(B) Yields SO2 with dil (Q) SrSO3 (A) 53 (B) 52
HCl on bonding (C) 63 (D) 32
(C) Soluble in aqueous (R) SrSO4 8. Let a1, a2, a3, ...... be terms of an A.P. If
solution a1 + a 2 + .... + a p p2 a
= 2 , p ≠ q, then 6 equals-
(D) Insoluble in aqueous (S) CdS a1 + a 2 + ..... + a q q a 21
solution
(A) 41/11 (B) 7/2
(C) 2/7 (D) 11/41
MATHEMATICS 9. The curve y = ax3 + bx2 + cx is inclined by 45º to
Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each x-axis at origin and it touches x-axis at (1,0). Then-
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of (A) a = –2, b = 1, c = 1 (B) a = 1, b = 1, c = –2
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in (C) a = 1, b = –2, c = 1 (D) a = –1, b = 2, c = 1
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer. (Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
1. The area enclosed by | y | – | x | = 1 and x2 + y2 =1 is contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
(A) 2 units2 (B) zero units2
2 ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
(C) infinite units (D) none of these against the question number of that question. +3 marks
2. Least value of the expression 9sec2θ + 4cosec2θ, is- will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
(A) 6 (B) 1 (C) 36 (D) 25 each wrong answer.
x
3. ∫
Let f (x) = (2( x − 1)( x − 2) 3 + 3( x − 1) 2 ( x − 2) 2 ) dx ,
1
the following Key to choose the appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
then- explanation of (A).
(A) f has exactly 4 critical points (B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
(B) f has maximum at x = 2 correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(C) x = 7/5 is minima & x = 1 is maxima
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.
(D) none of these
10. Assertion (A) : Let z be a complex number satisfying
4. The locus of the middle points of chords of a |z – 3| ≤ |z – 1|, |z – 3| ≤ |z – 5|, |z – i| ≤ |z + i|
parabola which subtend a right angle at the vertex of and |z – i| ≤ |z – 5i|. Then the area of region in which
the parabola is- z lies is 12 sq. units.
(A) Circle (B) Parabola 1
(C) Ellipse (D) Straight line Reason (R) : Area of trapezium = (sum of parallel
2
5. The probability that a particular day in the month of sides) (Distance between parallel sides)
july is a rainy day is 3/4. Two person whose
credibility are 4/5 and 2/3 respectively claim that 15th 11. Let f (x) = | 1 – x | and g(x) = sin–1(f | x |)
july was a rainy day. The probability that it was real Assertion (A) : Number of values of x, where g(x) is
a rainy day. non differentiable is 3.
(A) 3/4 (B) 24/25 (C) 8/9 (D) none Reason (R) : Domain of g(x) is [–1, 1]

12. Assertion (A) : If eccentricities of two ellipse are 18. Area bounded by f(x) = xA and g(x) = xB is-
same then their areas are also same. A+B B−A
(A) (B)
x2 y2 n n
Reason (R) : Area of the ellipse + =1
a 2 b2 2A B
(a < b, a > 0, b > 0) is π ab square units. (C) (D)
A + 2B + n n+A+B
13. Consider a circle S : (x – 2)2 + (y – 3)2 = 13 and a line
19. Number of real roots of the equation
L : y = x – 12.
Assertion (A) : Chord of contact of pair of tangents (xB – nxA)1/A = 6 are
drawn from every point on L = 0 to S = 0 passes (A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1 (D) 0
through P(3, 2)
Reason (R) : Pole of polar L = 0 with respect to This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
S = 0 is P(3, 2) Each question contains statements given in two columns
This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S)
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R,
against the question number of that question. +4 marks C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4
will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for matrix should be as follows :
each wrong answer. P Q R S
A P Q R S
If f (xy) = f (x) . f (y) and f is differentiable at x = 1 B Q R
P S
such that f '(1) = 1 also f (1) ≠ 0, then P Q
C R S
14. f (x) is - D Q R S
P
(A) continuous for all x ∈ R
Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
(B) discontinuous at x = –1, 0, 1
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
(C) differentiable for all x ≠ 0 given for complete correct answer and No Negative
(D) None of these marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
15. f '(7) equals- given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
(A) 7 (B) 14 (C) 1 (D) None 20. Match the Column :
16. Area bounded by curve f(x), x axis and ordinate Column-I Column-II
x = 4, is- (A) The reflection of the point (P) 5
(A) 64/3 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) None (t – 1, 2t + 2) in a line is
(2t + 1, t) then the line has
slope equal to
1
There exists a G.P. with first term and common (B) If θ be the angle between (Q) 6
A
two tangents which are drawn
1
ratio A (A > 1). If we add in the sum of first n to the circle x2 + y2 – 6 3 x – 6y + 27 = 0
2
terms of the sequence, it equals to the sum of the from the origin, then 2 3 tanθ
coefficients of even power of x in the expansion of
(1 + x)n. If we interchange the first term & common equals to
ratio of given G.P., the sum of new infinitely (C) The shortest distance between (R) 2 7
decreasing G.P. is equal to B, where A, B and n are
parabolas y2 = 4x and y2 = 2x – 6
related by the relation
B− 2
364 is d then d2 =
∫
A−2
(1 + x ) n dx =
3
(D) Distance between foci of the (S) 1
(1 + x ) A − n − B curve represented by the equation
17. The value of lim is-
x →A x−A x = 1 + 4cosθ, y = 2 + 3sinθ is
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) e (D) 8

21. Column-I Column-II
(A) If y = 2[x] + 9 = 3[x + 2], where (P) – 1
[.] denotes greatest integer function,
1
then [x + y] is equal to
6
x
 1 1
(B) If lim  sin + cos  = ek/2 then (Q) 0
x → ∞
k is equal to
x x
Chemistry Facts
(C) If three successive terms of a G.P. (R) 2 • At 0 degress Celsius and 1 atmospheric pressure,
with common ratio r, (r > 1) forms one mole of any gas occupies approximately
the sides of a triangle then [r] + [–r] 22.4 liters.
is equal to (where [.] denotes
greatest integer function) • Atomic weight is the mass of an atom relative to
(D) Let f(x) = (x2 – 3x + 2)(x2+3x+2) (S) 3 the mass of an atom of carbon-12 which has an
and α, β, γ are the roots of atomic weight of exactly 12.00000 amu.
f '(x) = 0, then [α]+[β] + [γ] is • If the atom were the size of a pixel (or the size
equal to (where [.] denotes greatest of a period), humans would be a thousand miles
integer function) tall.
22. Column-I Column-II • It would require about 100 million

(A) The order and degree of the (P) 13 (100,000,000) atoms to form a straight line one
differential equation centimeter long.
dy d2y
3 − 4 2 − 7 x = 0 are • The weight (or mass) of a proton is
dx dx 1,836.1526675 times heavier than the weight (or
a and b then a + b is mass) of an electron.
r r
(B) If a = î + 2 ĵ + 3k̂ , b = 2î − ĵ + k̂ (Q) 102
r r r r • The electron was first discovered before the
and c = 3î + 2 ĵ + k̂ and a × (b × c) proton and neutron, in 1897 from English
r r r
is equal to xa + yb + zc , then physicist John Joseph Thomson.
x + y + z is equal to • The neutron was discovered after the proton in
(C) The number of 4 digit numbers (R) 5
1932 from British physicist James Chadwick,
that can be made with the digits
which proved an important discovery in the
1,2,3,4,3,2
development of nuclear reactors.
dx
(D) If ∫
( x + 1)( x 2 + 4)
2
= (S) 7
• Carbon dioxide was discovered by Scottish
chemist Joseph Black.
a a x
tan −1 x − tan −1   + k
b c d • When silver nitrate is exposed to light, it results
where k is constant of integration, in a blackening effect. (Discovered by Scheele,
which became an important discovery for the
then 2a + b + c + d is
development of photography).
(where a & b and a & c are
co-prime numbers)

Based on New Pattern
IIT-JEE 2013
XtraEdge Test Series # 10
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
• Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
• Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for
correct answer and –1 mark for wrong answer.
• Question 14 to 19 are passage based questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong
answer.
• Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer (i.e. +1 marks for each correct row) and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
(A) x = 40 cm (B) x = 60 cm
PHYSICS (C) x < 60 cm (D) x > 60 cm
Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each 5. Figure shows a toy-whistle. It a disk made of plastic
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of having two conical grooves at diametrically opposite
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in point. When it is rotated about its centre with
OMR sheet against the question number of that sufficiently high speed air intercepted by groove
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct produce whistling sound. An observer is at a distance
answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer. 10 m from the centre of toy. Radius of toy is 15 cm.
1. Ice point on a particular scale measure 22º. The scale Frequency of sound emitted by toy when it is rotating
agrees with Fahrenheit scale at 72ºF. The 1800
with ω = rpm is 10 kHz. If velocity of sound
temperature in Fahrenheit scale when new scale π
reads 27º is - in air 300 m/s, beat frequency heard by observer is –
(A) 40ºF (B) 38ºF (C) 36ºF (D) 34ºF
2. A hot body is kept in a chamber maintained at fixed
lower temperature. Time taken by body in loosing O
half the maximum heat it can lose is
5 min. Time taken by body in loosing the maximum
heat it can lose is -
(A) 10 Hz (B) 15 Hz (C) 20 Hz (D) None
(A) 10 min (B) 12 min (C) 20 min (D) Infinite
6. An ice cube is fixed at the bottom of container
3. A point source of power 4 W is placed at the centre
containing water. Water in the container will be
of spherical shell. The shell is kept in a vacuum
cooled majorly by -
chamber maintained at 27ºC. If shell attains a
constant temperature 37ºC, emissivity of surface of (A) Convection (B) Conduction
shell is nearly - (C) Radiation (D) Convection and conduction
1 1 2 4 7. In a region of space a constant force F newton acts
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 5 on a particle of mass m, which is released from rest
at point A. When the particle reaches B its –
4. In a resonance–column experiment, a long tube, open
→
at top, is clamped vertically. Water level inside tube F
can be moved up or down. First resonance is
occuring when water level is at depth 20 cm below m
open end. Let second resonance occurs when water A B
level is at a distance ‘x’ below opening, then -

(A) potential energy (PE) increases but kinetic energy 11. Assertion (A) : Two tube of same length but
(KE) decreases. different diameter vibrating in same harmonic.
(B) PE decreases but KE increases. Frequency of tube having smaller diameter will be
(C) PE remains constant but KE increases. more.
Reason (R) : End-correction is less in tube of smaller
(D) PE decreases but KE remains constant
diameter.
8. A L shaped rod whose one rod is horizontal and other 12. Assertion (A) : When an observer moves towards
is vertical is rotating about a vertical axis as shown stationary source frequency heard by observer is
with angular speed ω. The sleeve shown in figure has more than that frequency emitted by source.
mass m and friction coefficient between rod and Reason (R) : Wavelength of sound wave received by
sleeve is µ. The minimum angular speed ω for which observer becomes smaller.
sleeve cannot sleep on rod is –
ω 13. Assertion (A) : At height h from ground and at depth
h below ground, where h is approximately equal to
m sleeve
0.62 R, the value of g acceleration due to gravity is
same.
l Reason (R) : Value of g decreases both sides, in
g µg going up and down.
(A) ω = (B) ω =
µl l This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
l
(C) ω = (D) None of these has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
µg ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
9. Four particles of equal mass M move along a circle of will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational each wrong answer.
attraction. The speed of each particle is - Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
GM  GM  A vertical cylindrical tube has its lower end closed.
(A) (B) 2 2 R 
R   There is small opening in the bottom of the tube by
which level of water in tube can be adjusted. Length
 GM   GM  2 2 + 1  of tube is 50 cm. Velocity of sound in air and water
(C)  R (2 2 + 1) (D)   
    is 320 m/s and 1440 m/s respectively. Water is filled
 R  4 
in tube upto height 30 cm.
This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13, 14. Minimum frequency with which tube can resonate is-
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question (A) 300 Hz (B) 320 Hz
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question (C) 400 Hz (D) 450 Hz
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet 15. Minimum frequency so that standing waves can be
against the question number of that question. +3 marks formed both in air and liquid column -
will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for (A) 400 Hz (B) 800 Hz
each wrong answer. (C) 640 Hz (D) 900 Hz
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type questions. Use 16. Air column in tube is resonating with a tuning fork at
the following Key to choose the appropriate answer. its lowest possible frequency. Water level is lowered
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct slowly. Minimum distance by which water level has
explanation of (A). to be lowered so that intensity of sound become
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the maximum is -
correct explanation of (A). (A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) 40 cm (D) 50 cm
10. Assertion (A) : A string of length 28 cm, fixed at one A wire of length 1 m is clamped horizontally between
end vibrates in its 3rd overtone. Wave motion will not two rigid support.
be disturbed by holding the string at a distance 8 cm
from fixed end. 17. Wire is plucked at a distance 30 cm from one end.
Reason (R) : Position of nodes in the above string Lowest harmonic in which wire can resonate is -
will at distance 4 cm, 8 cm, …. from fixed end. (A) 3rd (B) 4th (C) 5th (D) 10th

r
18. A light ring which can slip frictionlessly over wire is 21. A body of mass ‘m’ is acted upon by net force F .
slipped over wire. When a tuning fork start
r and v be their initial position and velocity. All
resonating with wire, ring is found to be at rest at a
distance 15 cm from one end. If velocity of wave in quantity are in S.I. unit . Then match the following.
wire is 10 m/s, minimum frequency of tuning fork is- Column-I Column-II
(A) 50 Hz (B) 60 Hz
(A) F = − 4 x 2 î , r = 0 , (P) Motion : S.H.M.
(C) 70 Hz (D) None of these
19. Now two light rings are slipped on wire which can v = 2î , m = 2
move frictionlessly. When wire is plucked, the two (B) F = (2 − 4 y) ĵ , r = 0 (Q) Motion : Non-periodic
rings are found to be at rest separated by 12 cm.
Maximum wavelength of wave in wire is - v=0,m=1
(A) 4 cm (B) 8 cm
(C) 12 cm (D) 24 cm (C) F = − 2( x + x 3 )î , (R) Path : Straight line
This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22). r = 10 –2 î v = 0 , m = 1

(D) F = − 4( x î + yĵ) (S) Time period : π
Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S) r = 2 ĵ , v = 6î , m = 1
in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be
appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following
example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R, 22. The cubical container filled with water is given
C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4 →
matrix should be as follows : acceleration a = a0 î + a0 ĵ + a0 k̂ , then : (neglect
the effect of gravity)
P Q R S
E F y
A P Q R S
B P Q R S C
D
C P Q R S
D P Q R S
G x
H
Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be B A z
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be Column-I Column-II
given for a correctly marked answer in any row. (A) Pressure at point A is (P) less than pressure
20. A small ring of mass m passes through a smooth wire at point G
bent in form of horizontal circle. The ring is (B) Pressure at point D is (Q) less than pressure
connected to a spring whose other end is fixed at A at point F
on the wire as shown. The natural length of spring is (C) Pressure at point E is (R) Greater than
mg pressure at point C
R and spring constant is where m is mass of the
R (D) Pressure at point H is (S) Greater than pressure
ring and R is also the radius of circle. Initially the
at point B
ring is released from rest from position B and it
moves towards C as in the figure. (N = Normal
reaction between wire and ring, v = speed of ring)
C CHEMISTRY
wire
60º Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
A B question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
Column-I Column-II question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
(A) N = mg (P) at position B answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer.
(B) N = zero (Q) at position C 1. Which of the substance has maximum number of
(C) N = 2 mg (R) some where between hydrogen atoms per gm of the substance ?
At. wts. : Cu – 63.5 ; S – 32 ; O –16 ; H –1
position B and position C
(A) CH4 (B) CuSO4. 5H2O
(D) v = gR (S) never
(C) H2O2 (D) H2O

2. In the reaction 3 Cu + 8 HNO3 → 3 Cu(NO3)2 This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
+ 2NO + 4 H2O (Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
what is the equivalent weight of HNO3? if molecular contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
weight of HNO3 is M - has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
M 3 4 against the question number of that question. +3 marks
(A) M (B) (C) M (D) M
3 4 3 will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
3. The order of magnitude of ionic radii of ions Na+,
Mg2+, Al3+ and Si4+ is : The following questions given below consist of an
(A) Na+ > Si4+ > Al3+ > Mg2+
the following Key to choose the appropriate answer.
(B) Mg2+ > Na+ > Al3+ > Si4+
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
(C) Na+ > Mg2+ > Al3+ > Si4+
explanation of (A).
(D) Si4+ > Al3+ > Mg2+ > Na+
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
4. The correct order of tendency of polymerization is - correct explanation of (A).
(A) SiO44– < PO43– < SO42– < ClO4– (C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(B) PO43– < SiO44– < SO42– < ClO4– (D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.
(C) ClO4– < SO42– < SiO44– < PO43– 10. Assertion (A) : F atom has a less negative electron
(D) SiO44– > PO43– > SO42– > ClO4– gain enthalpy than Cl atom.
KP Reason (R) : Additional electron are repelled more
5. for the gaseous reaction – effectively by 3p electron in Cl atom than by 2p
KC electron in F atom.
(a) 2 A + 3 B 2C
(b) 2 A 4B 11. Assertion (A) : When a non-volatile solute is added
to water ice equilibrium, some ice melts.
(c) A + B + 2C 4D
would be respectively - Reason (R) : Ice melts to dilute the solution in order
to increase the vapour pressure in accordance to
(A) (RT)–3 , (RT)2, (RT)º Le-Chatelier's principle.
(B) (RT)–3 , (RT)–2, (RT)–1
(C) (RT)–3 , (RT)2, (RT) H
(D) None of the above
12. Assertion (A) : CN is called
cyclohexancarbonitrile.
6. No. of heteroatoms (other than C) present in the
Reason (R) : It is an aromatic compound.
following heterocyclic compound is –
O 13. Assertion (A) : The following compounds are
optically inactive.
N–H CH3
CH3 CH3 CH3
H
Cl
H Cl H Cl H Cl
CH2
CH2 CH2
H Cl H CH2
O Cl CH2
H Cl CH2
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0 CH3 CH3
CH3 H Cl
CH3
7. & are – Reason (R) : the meso compounds do not have any
(A) Tautomers (B) Functional chiral C atom so have optical rotation is zero.
(C) Position (D) All the above
This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
8. Which does not exists in solid state - choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
(A) LiHCO3 (B) CaCO3 has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
(C) NaHCO3 (D) Na2CO3 ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
9. Decomposition of H2O2 is retarded by -
will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
(A) Acetanilide (B) MnO2 each wrong answer.
(C) Zinc (D) Finely divided metals

Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16) P Q R S
+ –
PCl5 in solid state exists as PCl4 and PCl6 . Also in A P Q R S
some solvents it undergoes dissociation as B P Q R S
2PCl5 PCl4+ + PCl6– C P Q R S
14. The geometry and hybridisation of PCl5 is - D P Q R S
(A) Trigonal bipyramid, sp3d
(B) Tetrahedral, sp3 Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
(C) Octahedral, sp3 d2 given for complete correct answer and No Negative
(D) none of these marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
15. The geometry and hybridisation of PCl4+ is - given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
(A) Tetrahedral, sp3 20. Column-I Column-II
(B) Octahedral, sp3 d2 (A) Primary standard base (P) Na2C2O4
(C) Trigonal pyramid, sp3d
Molecular wt
(D) See-saw, sp3 d (B) Equiv. wt = (Q) Na2B4O7
2
16. The geometry and hybridisation of PCl6– is - (C) Primary standard reducing (R) Na2CO3
(A) Octahedral, sp3 d2 agent
(B) Tetrahedral, sp3 d2 (D) Capable of reducing (S) As2O3
(C) Square planar bipyramid, sp3 d
hardness of water due to
(D) See-saw, sp3 d 2+
the presence of Ca
Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19) 21. Column-I Column-II
The IE1 and IEII in kJ/mol of a few elements are (A) Tc/Pc (P) Z
given in the following table (B) Tc/Vc (Q) a/Rb
Element IEI in kJ/Mol IEII in kJ//mol (C) TB (R) 8b/R
P 2372 5251 (D) Ti/TB (S) 8a/81 Rb2
Q 520 7300 22. Column-I Column-II

R 900 1760 B
S 1680 3380
(A) P (P) Temperature
A
17. Which of the above element is likely to be alkali is increasing
metal ?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S V
18. Which of the above element is likely to be alkaline
earth metal ?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S A B
P
(B) (Q) Isotherm
19. Which of the above element is likely to be noble gas?
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S
T
This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22). A
Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S) P
in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be (C) (R) Isochoric
appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following B
example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R,
C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4 T
matrix should be as follows :

B 8. Point of intersection of straight lines represented by
6x2 + xy – 40y2 – 35x – 83y + 11 = 0 is-
(A) (3, 1) (B) (3, –1) (C) (–3, 1) (D) (–3, –1)
P A
(D) (S) Pressure is increasing 9. Number of points outside the hyperbola
3x2 – y2 = 48 from where two perpendicular tangents
can be drawn to the hyperbola is/are -
T (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) infinite (D) None
This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,

MATHEMATICS (Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in against the question number of that question. +3 marks
OMR sheet against the question number of that will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct each wrong answer.
answer and – 1 mark for each wrong answer. The following questions given below consist of an
1. In a ∆ABC, if r = r2 + r3 –r1 and ∠A > π/3 then range "Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type questions. Use
s the following Key to choose the appropriate answer.
of is equal to- (A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
a
explanation of (A).
1  1  1  (B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
(A)  , 2  (B)  , ∞  (C)  , 3  (D) (3, ∞)
2  2  2  correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
2. Vector perpendicular to î – ĵ – k̂ and in the plane of
î + ˆj + k̂ and – î + ĵ + k̂ is 10. Assertion (A) : The length of the shortest intercept
(A) î + k̂ (B) 2 î + ĵ + k̂ made by the family of lines (1 + λ) x + (λ – 1) y
+ 2 (1– λ) = 0 on the parabola x2 = 4(y – 1) is 5.
(C) 3 î +2 ĵ + k̂ (D) 4 î – 2 ĵ –2 k̂ Reason (R) : Latus rectum is the shortest focal chord
of the parabola.
3. If a, b ∈ R, a ≠ 0 and roots of ax2 – bx + 1 = 0
imaginary, then a + b + 1 is 11. Assertion (A) : If S1 and S2 are non-concentric
(A) Zero (B) Positive circles then their radical axis must exist.
(C) Negative (D) None of these Reason (R) : S1,S2, S3 are three circles such that no two
are concentric then their radical centre is defined.
4. Number of distinct normals that can be drawn to the
curve x2 = 4y from point (1, 2), is 12. Assertion (A) : If two straight lines intersect the x-
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 axis at A and B and y-axis at C and D such that
OA.OB = OC.OD, O being origin then points A, B,
5. ABC is a triangle whose medians AD and BE are C, D are concyclic.
perpendicular to each other. If AD = p and BE = q Reason (R) : If a secant through a point P intersects
then area of ∆ABC is- a circle at Q and R then PQ.PR is independent of the
2 3 4 3 direction of the secant.
(A) pq (B) pq (C) pq (D) pq
3 2 3 4
13. Assertion (A) : The equation
6. If (21.4)a = (0.00214)b =100, then the value of (log x)2 – log x3 + 2 = 0 has only one solution.
1 1 Reason (R) : log x2 = 2 log x if x > 0
– is :
a b
(A) rational but not integral This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
(B) prime choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
(C) irrational has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
(D) composite ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
7. For 3 ≤ r ≤ n will be given for each correct answer and – 1 mark for
n
Cr + 3 nCr–1 + 3 nCr–2 + nCr–3 is- each wrong answer.
(A) n+3Cr (B) 2 n+2Cr+2 (C) 3 n+1Cr+1 (D) 3 nCr

Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16) Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
It is given that A = (tan–1x)3 + (cot–1x)3, where number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
x > 0 & B = (cos–1t)2 + (sin–1t)2, where given for complete correct answer and No Negative
 1  marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
–1 –1 π
t∈ 0,  & sin x + cos x = for –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 & given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
 2 2
20. Match the following
π
tan–1x + cot–1 x = ∀ x∈R Consider a plane P = 0 on whom foot of
2 perpendicular from point (1, 1, 1) is (2, 3, 4).
14. The interval in which A lie is Column-I Column-II
 π3 π3   π3 π3   π3 π3  (A) sum of intercepts of P = 0 (P) 52/7
(A)  ,  (B)  ,  (C)  ,  (D) None
on coordinate axis is
 8 2   32 8   10 5 
(B) perpendicular distance of (Q) 110/3
15. Maximum value of B is (0, 0, 0) from plane is λ then λ2 is
(C) A line through (0, 0, 0) and (R) 120
π2 π2 π2
(A) (B) (C) (D) None perpendicular to plane is
8 16 4
x y z
16. If least value of A is λ & max. value of B is µ then = = then a + b+ c may be
a b c
  λ − µπ   (D) Radius of circle obtained by (S) 200/7
cot–1  cot   =
  µ  plane 'P' and sphere x2 + y2 + z2
π −π 7π −7 π = 36 is 'r' then r2 is equal to
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 8 8 8 21. Match the Column :
Column-I Column-II
Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19) (A) Distance of 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 (P)1
Consider lines from (1, 1) is
x −2 y−3 z −4 x −1 y − 4 z − 5 (B) Area of ∆ formed by x + y = 2 (Q) 4/3
L1 : = = , L2 : = =
1 1 −k 2 2 1 with co-ordinate axis is
17. A vector perpendicular to L1 &L2 and of length 3 2 (C) Circumcentre of ∆ formed by (R) 2/5
is- (When k = 1) 3x + 4y – 7 = 0 and axis is
(A) 3 î –3 ĵ (B) 2(3 î +2 ĵ – k̂ ) (h, k) then h + k is
(D) Two sides of ∆ are x + y = 1 (S) 49/24
(C) –3 î +4 ĵ + 2 k̂ (D) 3 î + 4 k̂
and 2x + y + 4 = 0. If circumcentre
18. Value of 'k' so that lines L1 and L2 are coplanar, is - is (2, 1) then slope of third side is
(A) –1 (B) –1/2 (C) –2 (D) 2
22. Match the Column :
19. Equation of plane containing these lines is
Column-I Column-II
(A) x – y – 2 = 0 (B) 2x – y + 2 = 0
(A) Find the number of 6 digit (P) 1
(C) x – y + 7 = 0 (D) None of these
natural numbers, where each
This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22). digit appears at least twice
Each question contains statements given in two columns (B) In how many ways can five (Q) 677
which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in different books be tied up in
Column I have to be matched with statements (P, Q, R, S)
in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be three bundles
appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following (C) How many non-empty (R) 11754
example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S, B-Q, B-R, collections are possible by
C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly bubbled 4 × 4 using 5P's and 6 Q's
matrix should be as follows : (D) How many students do you (S) 25
P Q R S
need in a school to guarantee
A P Q R S that there are atleast 2 students,
B P Q R S who have the same 1st two
C P Q R S
initials in their 1st names
D P Q R S

MOCK TEST PAPER-3
CBSE BOARD PATTERN
CLASS # XII
SUBJECT : PHYSICS , CHEMISTRY & MATHEMATICS
So lu t ion s wi l l b e p ub lish ed in sa me iss ue
General Instructions : Physics & Chemistry
• Time given for each subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 70 for each.
• All questions are compulsory.
• Marks for each question are indicated against it.
• Question numbers 1 to 8 are very short-answer questions and carrying 1 mark each.
• Question numbers 9 to 18 are short-answer questions, and carry 2 marks each.
• Question numbers 19 to 27 are also short-answer questions, and carry 3 marks each.
• Question numbers 28 to 30 are long-answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
• Use of calculators is not permitted.
General Instructions : Mathematics
• Time given to solve this subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 100.
• All questions are compulsory.
• The question paper consists of 29 questions divided into three sections A, B and C.
Section A comprises of 10 questions of one mark each.
Section B comprises of 12 questions of four marks each.
Section C comprises of 7 questions of six marks each.
• All question in Section A are to be answered in one word, one sentence or as per the exact requirement of the question.
• There is no overall choice. However, internal choice has been provided in 4 questions of four marks each and
2 question of six marks each. You have to attempt only one of the alternatives in all such questions.
• Use of calculators is not permitted.
PHYSICS 8. In a closed surface incoming flux and outgoing flux

is 5 × 105 and 4 × 105 V-m respectively then find out
1. The spectrum of hydrogen atom has many lines the charge enclosed by surface.
although hydrogen atom contain only one electron 9. A freshly prepared radioactive substance of half life
why ? 2 hours emits radiation of intensity which is 64 times
2. What happens to the frequency when light passes the permissible safe level. Find the minimum time
from one medium to another. after which it would possible to work with this
source safely.
3. What are coherent sources of light
4. If the intensity of the incident radiation on a metal is 10. Why does the conductivity of a semiconductor change
doubled, what happens to the kinetic energy of the with the rise in temperature.
emitted photoelectrons. 11. In optical fiber refractive index of cladding is less
5. Prove mathematically that the average power over a than core. Why ?
complete cycle of alternating current through an 12. Where should an object be placed from a convex lens
ideal inductor is zero. to from an image of the same size ? Can it happen in
6. Figure shows a branch of a circuit. Find out the value the case of a concave lens ?
of potential difference between A and B.
1A
13. A transmitting antenna at the top of tower has a
B height of 36 m and the height of the receiving
A 2Ω + – 1Ω antenna is 49 m. What is the maximum distance
2V
between them for satisfactory communication in the
7. Write the following radiations in an ascending order LOS mode ?
in respect of their frequencies : (Radius of earth = 6400 km)
X–rays, microwaves, ultraviolet rays, radiowaves

14. Derive the expression for the capacitance of a 23. The given figure shows a network of resistances R1,
parallel plate capacitor, having two identical plates R2, R3 and R4. Using Kirchhoff's laws, establish the
each of area A and separated by a distance d, when balance condition for the network.
the space between the plates is filled by a dielectric B
medium.
R1 R2
15. In a meter bridge shown in circuit diagram, the
balance point is found to be at 40 cm from the A G C
end A when resistor Y is of value 20 Ω.
Calculate the shifting in of balancing point on the R3 R4
same wire if X and Y are interchanged.
X Y D
B
+ –
A G
C
24. Distinguish between resistance, reactance and
D impedance for an a.c. circuit. Draw graph showing
variation for reactance of (i) a capacitor (ii) an
inductor with frequency of the circuit.
E
16. Two parallel wires of infinite length have linear 25. A 0.5 m long metal rod PQ completes the circuit as
shown. The area of the circuit is perpendicular to the
charge densities λ1 and λ2 coulomb/metre. Derive an
magnetic field of flux density 0.15 T. If the
expression for force per unit length acting between
them. resistance of the total circuit is 3 Ω. Calculate the
force needed to move the rod in the direction as
17. A 10 µF capacitor is charged by a 30 V d.c. supply indicated with speed 2 ms–1.
and then connected across an uncharged 50 µF
capacitor. Calculate (i) the final potential difference × × × × × ×Q× × × ×
across the combination and (ii) the initial and final × × × × × × × × ××
× × × × × × × × ×v ×
energies. How will you account for the difference in × × × × × × × × ××
energy ? × × × × × ×P× × × ×
18. Amplitude of electric field in an electromagnetic wave 26. Explain the principle and working of cyclotron with
is 3×106 V/m. Find amplitude of magnetic field. the help of a labelled diagram.
19. Explain it 27. Using Gauss' theorem, deduce an expression for the
(i) work function electric field intensity at any point due to a thin,
(ii) Threshold frequency infinitely long wire of charge/length λ C/m.
(iii) Threshold wave length
28. What is diffraction ? write down its difference with
(iv) Stopping potential
interference ? If single slit diffraction is obtained by
20. Show that the energy of the first excited state of He+ using light of wavelength 5000Å and slit width 0.5
atom is equal to the energy of the ground state of mm. Then calculate angular width of central
hydrogen atom maxima.
OR
21. In a young's double slit experiment, the slits are What is dispersion ? How the angular dispersion is
separated by 0.56 mm and the screen is placed 2.8 m defined ? Which colours is deviated maximum by a
away. The distance between the central bright fringe prism ? Calculate dispersive power of crown glass if
and the fifth bright fringe is measured to be 1.5 cm. refractive indices for red, yellow and violet colours
Determine the wavelength of light used in the are 1.5140, 1.5170 and 1.5318 respectively.
experiment.
22. A communication system having operating wavelength • 29. What is spectrum ? write down types of spectrum
?
λ in m can use only x% of its source frequency as its
channel bandwidth. The system is to be used for • OR
transmitting TV signals requiring bandwidth of F Hz, • If electrons trans it from first excited state of
How many channels can this system transmit H-atom to ground state and emitted radiations
simultaneously incidents over a metallic surface of threshold
wavelength 4000 Å, then what is the value of

maximum kinetic energy of electrons emitted from (i) Ethyl isocyanide to ethylamine
this surface ? (ii) Aniline to N-Phenylethanamide
30. With the help of a neat and labelled diagram, explain
11. Write the structural formulae of A, B, C and D in the
the underlying principle and working of a moving following sequence of reaction :
coil galvanometer. What is the function of:
H2O
(i) uniform radial field A + CH3MgBr CH3CH2 – CH – CH3
(ii) soft iron core in such a device ? OH
OR
Derive a mathematical expression for the force per Alc. KOH Br2 –H2O
unit length experienced by each of the two long D C B
H2SO4
current carrying conductors placed parallel to each
other in air. Hence define one ampere of current.
12. Give the structural formulae and names of the
Explain why two parallel straight conductors carrying
products of the following reactions :
current in the opposite direction kept near each other in
air repel ? (i) Chloroform is heated with aniline in presence of
alc. KOH.
(ii) Phenol is treated with an excess of aqueous
bromine.
CHEMISTRY 13. For a Ist order chemical reaction rate constant is
2.303 sec–1. Determine the time required for 90%
1. Complete the following reactions :
completion of a chemical reaction
CH3–CH2–CH=CH2 + HCl → ………….
14. The vapour pressure of pure liquid A and B are 450
2. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing mm Hg and 700 mm Hg at 350 K respectively. Find
order of their acid strengths : the mole fractions of the components if total vapour
(i) Br2 – CH2 – CH2 – COOH pressure is 600 mm Hg.
(ii) Cl – CH – CH2 – COOH
| 15. Calculate the mass of a nonvolatile solute (molecular
Cl mass 40) which should be dissolved in 114 g octane
(iii) F – CH2 – CH2 – COOH to reduce its vaour pressure to 80%.
(iv) CH2 – CH2 – COOH 16. Describe the following with an example for each :
|
I (i) Aldol condensation
3. How will you distinguish between propanal & (ii) Trans-esterification
propanone.
17. Write reactions starting conditions for the following
4. What are amino acid. Write zwitterionic structure of conversions :
alanine.
(i) Benzene to Acetophenone
5. What happen when an electric field is applied to a (ii) Ethanal to Propanone
colloidal solution ?
18. (a) Compare the magnetic moments of the following
6. Explain the Frenkel defect with suitable example. Cr+3, V+3, Fe+3
7. Why is the elevation in b.p. of water different in the (b) Which of the following is coloured
following solutions ? CuSO4(aq), [Sc(H2O)6]+3, ZnCl2
(i) 0.1 molar NaCl solution. 19. How are the following conversions carried out ?
(ii) 0.1 molar sugar solution. (Write reactions only)
(i) 1-bromopropane to 2-bromopropane
8. Write a IUPAC name of following :
(ii) Propanone to iodoform
CH3 – CH – C – C – OCH3
(iii) Phenol to salicylic acid
Br O O
20. Describe in brief the structure of DNA.
9. Complete the following reaction sequense :
∆
21. Write the structure of polymers :
(i) C6H5N2Cl + Cu2Cl2 → …………… (a) PVC (b) PMMA (C) PTFE
Hg −SO
(ii) HC ≡ CH  
H SO
4
→ .................. 22. What are antacids. Explain with example
2 4
10. For the following conversion reactions write the 23. What is adsorption ? How does adsorption of a gas
chemical equations : on a solid surface vary with

(a) temperature and (b) Pressure ? • Arrange these metals in their increasing order
Illustrate with the help of appropriate graphs. of reducing power.
24. Explain the following terms with suitable examples : 30. Arrange the following in order of the property
mentioned and give reason.
(i) Schottky defect, (ii) Interstitials
(i) F2, Cl2, Br2, I2 (Bond energy)
(iii) F-centres.
(ii) HCl, HF, HI, HBr (acidic strength)
25. A first order reaction is 20% complete in 10 minutes.
(iii) PH3, NH3, SbH3, AsH3 (basic strength)
Calculate (i) k of the reaction and (ii) time taken for
the reaction to go upto 75% completion. (iv) H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te (boiling point)
(v) HOCl, HClO2, HClO3, HClO4 (acidic strength)
26. (a) Name the lanthanoide element which forms
tetrapositive ions in aqueous solution.
(b) Why do Zr and Hf exhibit similar properties ?
(c) Colour of a solution of K2Cr2O7 depends on pH MATHEMATICS
of the solution. Why ?
27. (a) Write preparation of K2Cr2O7. Give reactions. Section A
(b) Complete reactions :
K2Cr2O7 + H2SO4 + KI → 1. From the differential equation representing the
KMnO4 + H2SO4 + H2S → family of curves y = A cos (x + B), where A and B
are parameter.
28. (a) Describe the preparation of acetic acid from
acetylene.
2. Evaluate : ∫ 1 + sin x / 2 dx .
(b) How can the following be obtained from acetic → →

acid 3. If a= iˆ – 2 ˆj + 3kˆ and b= î – 3k̂ , find
(i) Acetone → →
(ii)Acetaldehyde | b × 2 a |.
(c) In what way can acetic acid be distinguished → →
from acetone ? 4. If a = î + 2ˆj – 3k̂ ; b = 3iˆ – ˆj + 2 kˆ , show that
(d) Why do carboxylic acids not give the → → → →
characteristic reactions of a carbonyl group ? ( a + b ) is perpendicular to ( a – b ).
• OR
• (a) How would you account for the following : 5. Show that the four points whose position vectors are
• (i) Aldehydes are more reactive than ketones 6iˆ – 7 ˆj , 16iˆ – 29 ˆj – 4 kˆ , 3 ˆj – 6 kˆ and
towards nucleophiles.
(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones 2iˆ + 5 ˆj + 10 kˆ are coplanar.
are lower than of the corresponding acids
• (iii) The aldehydes and ketones undergo a 6. Write the following function in the simplest form
number of addition reactions. x
• (b) Give chemical tests to distinguish between : tan–1 .
(i) Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde a2 – x2
• (ii) Propanone and propanol
• 7. Find gof : If f (x) = |x| and g(x) = |5x – 2|.
• 29. (a) Calculate the EMF of the cell Mg (s)/Mg2+
(0.2 M) || Ag+ (1 × 10–3 M) / Ag ; E Θ Mg 2+ / Mg = – 8. If matrix A has order 3 × 4, matrix B has order
4 × 2 and matrix C has order 2 × 3, Find order of
2.37 V, E Θ Ag + / Ag = + 0.80 V. What will be the
(A.B.C).
effect on EMF if concentration of Mg2+ ion is
decreased to 0.1 M ?  0 x + 2
• (b) (i) Arrange the following metals in the order in 9. If A =  2x – 3 is skew symmetric,
which they displace each other from the  0 
solution of their salts. find x.
(ii) Given the standard electrode potentials ;
K+ / K = –2.93 V, Ag+ / Ag = 0.80 V, 2 4 2x 4
Hg2+ / Hg = + 0.79 V, Mg2+ / Mg = – 2.37 V, 10. Find value of x such that = .
5 1 6 x
Cr3+ / Cr = – 0.74 V

π 
Section B tan – x 
 4  , x ≠ π/4, find the value which
20. If f (x) =
cot 2 x
11. The odds against a certain event are 5 to 2 and the
odds in favour of another independent event are 6 to can be assigned to f (x), at x = π/4 so that f (x)
5. Find the chance that at least one of the events will becomes continuous every where in [0, π/2].
happen.
OR 21. Find the value of parameter α for which
f (x) = 1 + αx, α ≠ 0 is the inverse of itself.
In two successive throws of a pair of dice, determine
the probability of getting a total of 8, each time. 22. Use properties of determinants proof that
x+ y x x
dy
12. Solve (1 + x2) +2xy – 4x2 = 0. 5x + 4 y 4x x = x3.
dx
10 x + 8 y 8 x x + 4
x 1+ x  OR
13. Evaluate : ∫e  2
 (2 + x) 
dx .
1 x yz 1 x x2
OR Show that 1 y zx = 1 y y2
2x 1 z xy 1 z z2
Evaluate ∫ 1− x2 − x4
dx
and hence factorize.
dx
14. Evaluate : ∫ (sin x – 2 cos x)(2 sin x + cos x) . Section C
23. One bag contains five white and four black ball.
15. The position vectors of two points A and B are Another bag contains seven white and nine black
balls. A ball is transferred from the first bag to the
3iˆ + ˆj + 2 kˆ and iˆ – 2 ˆj – 4 kˆ respectively. Find the
second and then a ball is drawn from the second.
vector equation of the plane passing through B and Find the probability that the ball drawn is white.
perpendicular to the vector AB.
24. Find the area of the region bounded by x2 + y2 = 1 and
→ → (x – 1)2 + y2 = 1.
16. If a = iˆ – 3 ˆj + kˆ , b = iˆ – ˆj + kˆ and
π
→ → → → e cos x
c = 2iˆ – ˆj + kˆ , verify that a × ( b × c ) = 25. Evaluate : ∫e cos x
+ e – cos x
dx .
→ → → → → → 0
(a .c ) b –(a .b )c . Or
π/ 4
x + π/4
17. Find the equation of tangent to curve y = 3x – 2 . Evaluate : ∫ 2 – cos 2 x
dx .
Which is parallel to line 4x – 2y + 5 = 0. –π/ 4
.....∝ 26. Find the shortest distance between the following

x
x →
18. If y = x , then show that lines : r = (1 – t) iˆ + (t – 2) ĵ + (3 – 2t) k̂ and
→
dy y2 r = (s + 1) iˆ + (2s – 1) ĵ – (2s + 1) k̂ .
= .
dx x(2 – y log x)
27. A farmer has a supply of chemical fertilizer of type A
OR which contains 10% nitrogen and 6% phosphoric acid
 1+ x2 − 1− x2  and of type B which contains 5% of nitrogen and 10%
Differentiate tan–1   w.r.t,cos–1 x2 of phosphoric acid. After soil testing it is found that at
 1+ x2 + 1− x2 
  least 7 kg of nitrogen and the same quantity of
phosphoric acid is required for a good crop. the
19. If xy = ex–y, then prove that fertilizer of type A costs Rs. 5.00 per kg and the type
dy log x B costs Rs. 8.00 per kg. Using linear programming
= find how many kgs of each type of the fertilizer
dx (1 + log x) 2

should be bought to meet the requirement and the cost
be minimum. Solve the problem graphically.
OR
A furniture dealer deals only in two items-tables and
chairs. He has Rs.10,000 to invest and a space to
store at most 60 pieces. A table costs him Rs. 500 1. Emeralds have been produced synthetically in
and a chair Rs.200. He can sell a table at a profit of labs since 1848 and can be virtually
Rs.50 and a chair at a profit of Rs.15. Assume that indistinguishable from the genuine article.
he can sell all items that he buys. Using linear
programming formulate the problem for maximum 2. In the last 200 years the use of metals has
profit and solve it graphically. increased as scientists have discovered new ones:
until the 17th Century only 12 metals were
28. A wire of length 36 m is to be cut into two pieces. known - there are now 86.
One of the pieces is to be made into a square and
other into a circle. What should be lengths of two 3. The only person to have an element named after
pieces, so that combined area of the squared and him while still alive was Glenn Seaborg, the
circle is minimum. most prolific of all the element hunters.
29. Solve the system of equation by using matrix
method. 4. Traffic lights with red and green gas lights were
2 3 10 4 6 5 first introduced in London in 1868.
+ + =4; – + =1; Unfortunately, they exploded and killed a
x y z x y z policeman. The first successful system was
6 9 20 installed in Cleveland, Ohio in 1914.
+ – =2
x y z
5. In 1998, design student Damini Kumar at South
Bank University patented a teapot with a special
grooved spout, which she claims virtually rules
out dribbling.
Brain Teaser
6. Even though most items in the home today are
technologically up to date, most of us are still
Pears - There are a few trees in a garden. On one of using the standard light bulb designed in 1928!
them, a pear tree, there are pears (quite logical). But
after a strong wind blew, there were neither pears on 7. A chest x-ray is comprised of 90,000 to 130,000
the tree nor on the ground. How come? electron volts.
8. The strength of early lasers was measured in

Pears – Solution At first, there were 2 pears on the Gillettes, the number of blue razor blades a given
tree. After the wind blew, one pear fell on the ground. beam could puncture.
So there where no pears on the tree and there were no
pears on the ground.Another possible solutions: The 9. The first commercial radio station in the United
States, KDKA Pittsburgh, began broadcasting in
wind blew so hard that the pears fell of the tree and
November 1920.
blew along the ground into the water or hovering in
the air in a tornado. 10. A British rocket attack on US soldiers is
celebrated in the lyrics of the US National
Anthem.
11. Until the late 1800s, it was forbidden for women

in the United States to obtain a patent, so if a
woman had invented something she would file
for a patent under her husband or father's name.
For this reason, the number of early female
inventors remains a mystery.
12. Milt Garland, a 102 year old engineer, invented a

technology that forms ice on the exterior of a
casing instead of inside it, which is used to create
indoor ice rinks.
MOCK TEST-2 (SOLUTION)
MOCK TEST– 2 PUBLISHED IN JANUARY ISSUE
11. Ionisation energy:- Minimum energy required to

PHYSICS remove electron from its ground state.
Excitation energy:- Energy required to transit an
1. Refractive index is maximum for violet and electron to one of its excited state from ground state
minimum for red colour
KZe 2 KZe 2
2. Path difference between two waves should be odd KE = ;U=–
2r r
multiple of λ/2 or phase difference between two
waves should be odd multiple of π. ∴ U = −2KE
h 6.6 × 10−34 12. Emax. = 12V; Emin. = 4V

3. P= = = 1.32 × 10–27 kg-m/s
λ 5000 × 10 −10 E − E min 12 − 4 1
Ma = max = =
E max + E min 12 + 4 2
4. R = R0A1/3 ⇒ R ∝ A1/3 1
1 ∴ ma in percentage = × 100 = 50%
1/ 3 2
R 1  A1 3 R  8  2
∴ =   ⇒ =   = 13. Modulating signal being of low frequency cannot
R 2  A2  R 2  27  3
travel to large distance so it is modulated with high
3R frequency carrier. Frequency modulation is virtually
∴ R2 =
2 free from noise where as amplitude modulation
suffers from noise pollution.
5. It should be very high i.e. in KHz to GHz
14. Semiconductor atoms are tetravalent. The form
c covalent bonds by sharing their electrons with the
6. v = ; v2 < v3 < v1 neighboring atoms. When donor impurity of valency
µ
S is doped, the donor atoms takes the place of a
7. Resistivity or specific resistance of a material is semiconductor atom in the crystal lattice. Donor
defined as the resistance offered by a wire made by atoms forms covalent bond by sharing its four
that material having unit area of cross-section and electrons whereas the fifth electron of donor atom is
unit length. so loosely attached to the atom such that it behaves
as a free electron at room temperature.
W 1.6 × 10 –5
8. V= = = 50 volt 15. (i) width of depletion layer of zener diode
q 3.2 × 10 – 7 becomes very small due to heavy doping of
p and n regions.
9. Objective lens must have greater focal length than (ii) The field across depletion layer becomes very
eye-piece because magnifying power of lens
 V
 f  high Q E = 
 M P = 0  increases in this case.  d
 f e 
 16. Let at any instant charge on the capacitor is q, then
10. Conditions of interference q
p.d. V =
(i) waves must travel in the same medium in the C
same direction. Then work done to put additional charge dq is
(ii) Their frequencies and wavelengths must be q
dW = (dq) V =   dq
same C
(iii) Their plane of polarisation must be same ∴ Total work done to give charge Q is
(iv) Their must be maintained a constant phase Q
q Q2 1
difference between the waves. W= ∫
0
  dq =
 C
= CV2 (Q Q = CV)
2C 2

This work done is stored inside the capacitor as P.E. 22. 2 is NAND and 1 is OR gate
1 A B Y' Y
∴ U = W = CV 2
2 0 1 1 0
17. (i) A galvanometer can be converted into ammeter

23. R = (AB × 10c ± 5)%
by connecting a low resistance called shunt parallel
to the galvanometer coil. Yellow A = 4
(ii) A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter Violet B = 7
by connecting a large resistance in series with the Brown C = 1
galvanometer coil. ∴ R = (47 × 10 ± 5)%
= (470 ± 5)%
18. (i) Electromagnetic waves are produced by
accelerated charge. 24. (i) To make strong electromagnet
(ii) The velocity of electromagnetic wave in free (ii) To make high speed computers
space is equal to the velocity of light in free space.
(iii) It is transverse in nature. BV
25. tanθ =
BH
19. α = 2º ∴ BV = BH tanθ = 0.4 × 10–4 tan60º = 0.69 × 10–4 T and
β=? BH = Be cos θ
fo = 20 cm BH 0.4 × 10 −4
fe = 4 cm ⇒ Be = = = 0.8 × 10–4 T
cos θ cos 60º
β f β f f 
MP = and MP = o ∴ = o ⇒ β =  o α
 26. Biot–Savart′s law
α fe α fe  fe  This law is applicable to determine magnetic field
 20  due to small current element. Magnetic field due to
∴ β =   × 2 = 10 →
 4  small element dl at point A is given as
h
20. λ=
2mqV
i A
for proton →
→
h dl r
λ= …(i)
2meV
→ →
For α-particle → µ i (dl× r )
h dB = 0
λ= …(ii) 4π r 3
2 × 4m × 2eV'
µ 0 idl sin θ
By (i) and (ii) or dB =
4π r 2
2meV = 2 × 4m × 2eV'
where µ0 ⇒ Permeability of free space,
V' = V / 8 → →
θ ⇒ between dl and r .
21.
27. (i) On increasing distance between the coils, flux
linked decreases, hence mutual inductance decreases
Fe 56
e µ 0 N1N 2 A
d (ii) Q M =
c a → 2He4 l
BE/A b b → 4Be8 ∴ on increasing no. of turns, M increases
a (iii) when iron sheet (µr) is inserted
c → 6C12
d → 8O16 µ µNN A
Then M = 0 r 1 2
e → 10Ne20 l
A ∴ M increased, because for iron µr > > 1

28 Parallel light rays incidenting over a lens converges 29. Principal of van deGraff Generator : (i) Let a
to a point (convex lens) or seems to diverge from the small charged conducting shell of radius
point (concave lens) after refraction from lens. Then r be located inside a larger charged conducting shell
this point is called principle focus of lens. of radius R. If they are connected with a conductor,
When lens is dipped into a liquid of refractive index then charge q from the small shell will move to the
outer surface of bigger shell irrespection of its own
greater than lens material refractive index then
charge Q.
nature of lens gets changed.
Here potential difference
Focal length of lens is maximum for red and
minimum for violet colour. Q
R
I
II r
q
– µ1 = 1 µ2 µ1 = 1 +
= V(r) – V(R)
R1 = + 20; R2 → ∞ ; q 1 1 
=  – 
1  1 1 4πε0  r R 
= (µ2 – 1)  − 
f  + 20 ∞  In this way, the potential of the outer shell increases
1  1 1 considerably.
= (2 –1)  −  (ii) Sharp pointed surfaces have larger charge
f  20 ∞ 
densities, so these can be used to set up discharging
∴ f = +20 cm action.
Conducting
OR S Shell
i
M C2
r
α β γ
P C I Grounded
O u R
v
Steal Insulating
Tank Column
µ1
µ2
By snell's law C1 , C2
metal
m1 sin i = µ2 sin r Comb H
But for small aperture MP; vR
µ1i = µ2r …(i)
In ∆OCM; i = α + β
Target
and In ∆ICM; β = r + γ ⇒ r = β – γ.
Working :Let spray comb C1 be charged to a high +ve
∴ By (i) potential which spray +ve charge to the belt which in
turn becomes positively charged. Since belt is
µ1 (α + β) = µ2 (β – γ)
moving up, so it carries this positive charge upward.
 MP MP   MP MP  Opposite charge appears on the teeth of collecting
µ1  +  = µ2  PC − PI  comb C2 by induction from the belt. As a result of
 OP PC   
this, positive charge appears on the outer surface of
 1 1   1 1  shell S. As the belt is
µ1  +  = µ2  + R − + v  moving continuously, so the charge on the shell S
 − u + R   
increase continuously. Consequently, the potential
µ1 µ1 µ 2 µ 2 of the shell (S) rises, to a very high value.
– + = − Now the charged particles at the top of the tub (T)
u R R v
are very high potential with respect to the lower end
µ 2 µ1 µ 2 − µ1 of the tube which is earthed. Thus these particles get
− =
v u R accelerated downward and hit the target emerging
from the tube.

Use : It can be used to accelerate particles which are 1 q
used in nuclear physics for collision experiments. E1 =
4πε0 K (r + l 2 )
2
Or 1 q
(i) Intensity of the Electric field at a point on the (in the direction BP) and E2 =
4πε0 K (r + l 2 )
2
Axis of a Diople :
l l (in the direction PA)
A B E2 P E1
The magnitude of E1 and E2 are equal (but directions
are different). On resolving E1 and E2 into two
–q O +q
r
components parallel and perpendicular to AB, the
components perpendicular to AB
The intensities E1 and E2 are along the same line in (E1 sin θ and E2 sin θ) cancel each other (because
opposite directions. Therefore, the resultant intensity they are equal and opposite) while the components
E at the point P will be equal to their difference and parallel to AB (E1 cos θ and E2 cos θ), being in the
in the direction BP (since E1 > E2). That is, same direction ,add up. Hence the resultant intensity
E = E1 – E2 of electric field at the point P is
1 q 1 q E = E1 cos θ + E2 cos θ
= –
4πε0 K (r – l) 2
4πε0 K (r + l) 2 1 q 1 q
= cos θ + cos θ
q  1 1  4πε0 K (r 2 + l 2 ) 4πε0 K (r 2 + l 2 )
=  – 
4πε0 K  (r – l) 2 (r + l) 2  1 q
= 2 cos θ
4πε0 K (r + l 2 )
2
q  ( r + l ) 2 – ( r – l) 2 
=   OB OB
4πε0 K  (r 2 – l 2 ) 2  But from fig. cos θ = =
PB (OP + OB 2 )1/ 2
2
q  4lr  l
=  2 2 2 = .
4πε0 K  (r – l )  (r 2 + l 2 )1/ 2
1  2 (2 q l) r  1 q 2l
=   ∴ E=
4πε 0 K  (r 2 – l 2 ) 2  4πε0 K (r 2 + l 2 ) (r 2 + l 2 )1/ 2
But 2ql = p (electric dipole moment). 1 2ql
= .
1 2pr 4πε0 K (r + l 2 )3 / 2
2
∴ E=
4πε0 K (r – l 2 ) 2
2
But 2ql = p (moment of electric dipole).
If l is very small compared to r (l << r), then l may 2 1 p
E= .
be neglected in comparison to r2. Then the electric 4πε0 K (r 2 + l 2 )3 / 2
intensity at the point P due to the dipole is given by
If l is very small as compared to r ( l < < r), then l2
1 2pr 1 2p can be neglected in comparison to r2. Then the
E= = N/C.
4πε 0 K r 4 4πε 0 K r 3 electric intensity at the point P due to the dipole is
For vacuum (or air) K = 1. 1 p 1 p
E= = N/C.
1 2p 4πε0 K (r )2 3/ 2
4πε0 K r 3
∴ E= NC –1 …..(i)
4πε0 r 3 For vacuum (or air) K = 1
Intensity of the Electric Field at a point on the 1 p
NC –1 . …..(ii)
Equatorial Line of a Dipole. 4πε 0 r 3
E1
E2 The direction of the electric field E is parallel to the
θ E1 sin θ axis of the dipole from the positive charge towards
E P
the negative charge.
E2 Comparing eq. (i) and (ii) we see that for a short
θ dipole the intensity of the electric field on an axial
r P
E1 cos θ + point is twice the intensity at the same distance on
→ E2 cos θ the equatorial line.
P θ
A B (ii) W = Uf – Ui =PE (1 – cos θ) = PE (1 – cos 180°)
–q +q E2 sin θ
O
E2
= PE (1 + 1) = 2 PE
l l

φ
CHEMISTRY
A
30. 1 CH3CH 2CH 2CHO Ammonical

AgNO3
→ CH3CH 2CH 2COOH
E (Tollens' reagent )
Bu tanal Bu tanoic acid
t
2. 3-Amino-2-chloro butanamide
3. These are partly produced in body.
Ex. Histidine and arginine
4. yes, because O2 is paramagnetic
Or
5. In B.C.C no. of effective atoms are = 2
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to a
circuit containing a pure inductance only, Fig. In F.C.C no. of effective atoms are = 4
Suppose the alternating e.m.f. supplied is 6. In lyophillic colloids affinity is present between
represented by dispersed phase and dispersion medium and
E = E 0 sin ωt therefore it is more stable.
7. r = k [NO]2 [H2]
L
8. 6-Amino 3-chloro 4-hydroxy hexanamide
9. (i) Aldol condensation : Two molecules of an
aldehyde or a ketone having at least one α-hydrogen
atom, condense in the presence of a dilute alkali to
give β-hydroxy aldehyde or β-hydroxy ketone.
O OH
If dI/dt is the rate of change of current through L at
any instant, then induced e.m.f. in the inductor at the Dil. NaOH
CH3–C + HCH2CHO CH3–C–CH2CHO
same instant is = – L dI/dt . The negative sign
indicated that induced e.m.f. opposes the change of H H
current. To maintain the flow of current, the applied Ethanal Ethanal Aldol
voltage must be equal and opposite to the induced (ii) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis : Phthalimide on
voltage treatment with ethanoic KOH gives potassium
 dI  phthalimide which on heating with a suitable alkyl halide
i.e. E = –  – L  = Eo sin ωt
 dt  gives N-substituted phthalimides. These upon hydrolysis
with dil HCl under pressure give primary amines.
E0
or dI = sin ω t dt CO
L
NH + KOH (alc)
Integrating both sides, we get –H2O
CO
E
L ∫
I = 0 sin ωt dt Phthalimide
E 0  cos ωt  E C2H5I, ∆
CO
= –  = – 0 cos ωt
L  ω  ωL N–H+
–KI
E0 π  CO
=– sin  – ωt  Pot. Phthalimide
ωL 2 
E CO
or I = 0 sin (ωt – π/2) …(i) H+ / –H2O
ωL N–C2H5
The current will be maximum i.e. I = I0, when sin CO
(ωt– π/2) = maximum = 1. N-Ethylphthalimide
E0 COOH
From (i), I0 = ×1 …(ii)
ωL C2H5NH2 +
Putting in (i), we get COOH
I = I 0 sin(ωt – π / 2) Ethylamide Phthalic acid
This is the form of alternating current developed.

COCH3 15. (i) The reaction involved is
CH3COCl + Anhyd. AlCl3 2H2O → O2 + 4H+ + 4e–
10. (i)
F.C.acylation 2 mol H2O required ––– 4F charge
Benzene Acetophenone ∴ 1 mol H2O required ––– 2F charge
H H (ii) 2FeO + H2O ––– Fe2O3 + 2n+ + 2e–
CH3MgBr
(ii) CH3 – C = O CH3 – C – OMgBr 2 mol –––––––––––––2F
Dry ether
Ethanal
CH3 1 mol –––––––––––––1F
H+/H2O
16. (i) Fluorine (ii) Iodine
H
Cu 17. (i) Transition metals have unpaired e–
CH3 – C = O + H2 573 K
CH3 – C – OH
(ii) Transition metals and compounds have
CH3 CH3
unpaired e–
Propanone
11. The compound is CH3CH2CHO, Its IUPAC name is 18.

propanal. The isomer is CH3COCH3, acetone. H
| Dry ether
12. (i) Treat the compound with Lucas reagent (conc. (i) H – C = O + CH3CH2MgBr
HCl + anhy. ZnCl2) 2-propanol gives turbidity in 5 Methanal Grignard
min whereas ethanol gives no turbidity at room reagent
temperature
ZnCl
CH3CH2OH + HCl  2 → No reaction H
+
ZnCl2 H2O/H
CH3CHCH3 + HCl CH3–CH–CH3 + H2O H – C – OMgBr
OH Cl
CH2CH3
Turbidity appears
in 5 min
OH
(ii) Acetaldehyde reduces Tollen's reagent to
silver mirror but acetone does not. CH3CH2CH2OH + Mg
CH3CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + OH– → Propan-1-ol Br
CH3COO + 2H2O + 2Ag↓ + 4NH3 CH2OH COOH
Tollen 's reagent
CH3COCH3     
→ No action
KMnO4/H+
(ii)
Sol.3 (a) Where concentration of reactant become unity or
one litre rate of reaction is called as rate constant. Benzyl alcohol Benzoic alcohol
(b) The reaction which has order greater than one
but follows the kinetics of Ist order reaction is called
pseudo unimolecular reaction. Dry ether
19. (i) 2CH3 – CHI + 2Na
CH3 COOC2H5 + H2O(excesss) HCl
→ |
CH3 CH3 – CH – CH – CH3 + 2NaI
CH3COOH + C2H5OH
| |
CH3 CH3
velocit
y = K[CH3COOC2H5] 2,3-Dimethyl butane
LiAIH4
(ii) (CH3)2CO CH3–CH–CH3
14. (a) When NaCl is added neutralization of charge |
takes place which results in precipitation of OH
colloidal solution and coagulation takes place. 2-Propanol
(b) Due to scattering of blue wavelength of light it
makes image in our eye and sky appears blue.

OH undergoing concentration terms
simultaneous in the rate law
COOH CH3CO collisions in the expression
(iii) + reaction.
O
CH3CO 2. It is determined
2. It is a theoretical experimentally.
concept.
OCOCH3 3. It can have even
COOH 3. It can have integral zero value.
value only.
+ CH3COOH
4. It can also have
Aspirin 4. It cannot be zero. fractional values.
20. (a) ––CH2–CH=CH2––CH––CH––CH2–– 5. It tells us about the

H slowest step in the
C6H5 mechanism and hence
5. It does not tell us
H gives some clue about
anything about the
mechanism of the
(b) ––CH2–C–– mechanism of the
reaction.
H reaction.
C6H5
(c) ––CH2–CH––
H 24. (a) The conductivity of all the ions of the solution
CN
which is kept between electrodes 1 cm apart and area
21. Antibiotics are natural chemicals which kill/stop the of the electrodes 1 cm2.
growth Molar conductivity can be defined as conductance of
of bacteria all the ions present in the solution which contain 1
Types – mol electrolyte in certain volume and solution is
(A) Bactericidal : Ex- penicillin, afloxacin kept between electrodes 1 cm apart and area of the
(B) Bacteriostatic: Ex tetracycline, chloremphenicol electrodes such that whole solution is present
between them.
22. Vitamins are organic compounds required in small (b) In this cell Zn acts as anode and Ag as cathode
quantity for normal functioning of body E °cell = E °Ag – E °Zn
vitamin (C) is ascorbic acid. Deficiency- scurvy
vitamin B1 is thiamine acid. Deficiency – beri-beri = 0.344 – (– 0.76) = 1.104 V
vitamin (B12) is cyanocobalamine. Deficiency anaemia ∆G° = – n F E°cell = – 2 × 96500 × 1.104
= – 2.13 × 105 J
23 (i)
Rate of Reaction Rate constant of Reaction
zM
25. (A) We know d =
V × NA
1. It is the speed at 1. It is the constant of
which the reactants proportionality in the rate Z × 56
are converted into law equation ⇒ 7.86 =
the products at any (2.68 × 10 – 8 ) 3 × 6.02 × 10 23
moment of time
2. It depends upon the z –~ 2 i.e. B.C.C. structure
concentration of 2. It refers to the rate of the
reactants species at reaction at the (B) Total no. of atoms surrounding a particular atom
that moment of specific point when
time. in crystal structure is called coordination number.
concentration of every
reacting species is unity (i) In C.C.P → C.No. 12 ;
3. It generally 3. It is constant and does not (ii) In B.C.C → C.No. 8
decreases with depend on the progress of 3d 4s 4p
the reaction
progress of the 26. (a) 27Co+3 = [Ar]
reaction
d2sp3
(ii) Octahedral geometry
Molecularity Order
1. It is number of 1. It is the sum of
reacting species powers of

NH3 Acetylene Acetaldehyde
NH3 NH3 Acetaldehyde is finally oxidized to acid with air in
Co+3 the presence of manganous acetate catalyst
Manganous
NH3 NH3 CH 3CHO + [O]   → CH 3COOH
NH3 Acetaldehyde Acetate Acetic acid
Ca ( OH ) 2
(b) (i) CH3COOH  → (CH3COO)2 Ca
No unpaired e– therefore diamagnetic Calcium acetate
3d 4s 4p
+2
(b) 28Ni = [Ar]
 ∆ → CH 3CHO + 2CaCO 3
(HCOO)2 Ca
dsp2 Acetaldehyde
CN– CN– (ii) CH3COOH Ca

(OH ) 2
→ (CH3COO)2Ca
Acetic acid
Ni+2
∆
CN– → CH 3COCH 3 + CaCO 3
CN– Acetone
Square planar (c) When heated with I2 + NaCO3 Solution, acetone
No unpaired e– ∴ Diamagnetic in nature gives yellow crystals of iodoform CH3COCH3 +
3d 4s 4p 3NaOI → CH3I + CH3COONa
(c) 28Ni = [Ar] Acetone Yellow ppt.
sp 3 (Iodoform)
CO Acetic acid does not give iodoform test.

(d) The carbonyl group in – COOH is inert and does
not show nucleophilic addition reaction like
Ni
CO carbonyl compounds. It is due to resonance
CO stabilization of carboxylate ions.
R– C = O R – C = O–
CO
Tetrahedral geometry O– O
No unpaired e– ∴ Diamagnetic in nature Or
(a) (i) Due to smaller + I-effect of one alkyl group in
27. (a) (i) K2Cr2O7 + 7H2SO4 + 6KI aldehydes as a compared to larger +I-effect of two
→ Cr2(SO4)3 + K2SO4 + 7H2O + 3I2 alkyl groups, the magnitude of positive charge on the
(ii) 6 KMnO4 + 6 KOH + KI carbonyl carbon is more in aldehydes than in
→ 6K2MnO4 + 3H2O + KIO3 ketones. As a result nucleophilic addition reaction
(b) Lanthanoids have almost similar properties. occur more readily in aldehyde than in ketones.
28. (a) According to Henry's law mole fraction of a gas (ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are
is directly proportional to the pressure at which gas lower than corresponding acids and alcohols due to
is disolved absence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding .
p = k Hx (iii) Aldehydes and ketones undergo a number of
App. (1) Dissolution of gases in cold drinks addition reactions as both possess the carbonyl
(2) Dissolution of O2 in haemoglobin functional group which reacts a number of
(b) π = CRT nucleophiles such as HNC, NaHSO3, alcohols,
1.8 1000 ammonia derivatives and Grignard reagents.
= × × 0.0821 × 298 = 2.446 atm
180 10 (b) (i) Distinction between acetaldehyde and
∆Tf = Kfm = 1.86 × 0.1 = 0.186 benzaldehyde: Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde can
T = – 0.186ºC be distinguish by Fehling solution.
Acetaldehyde give red coloured precipitate with
29. (a) Acetylene is first oxidized with 40% H2SO4 in
Fehling solution while benzaldehyde does not.
the presence of HgSO4
2+ −
40%, H SO CH 3CHO + 2Cu
1442 +4 43 
5OH →
H–C≡C – H + H2O   
2

4 → CH3–CHO
1% HgSO 4 Fehling Solution

CH 3COO − + Cu 2 O + H 2 O 1. Given line is
x+2
=
y+3
=
z −3
.
red ppt. −1 7 3/ 2
(ii) Distinction between Propanone and Propanol : ∴ Its direction ratios are –1, 7, 3/2
Propanone (CH3COCH3) and propanol Or –2, 14, 3
(CH3CH2CH2OH) can be distinguish by iodoform Equation of line pasing through (1, 2, 3) is
test. Propanone when warmed with sodium x+2 y−2 z−3
= = .
hypoiodide (NaOI) i.e. I2 in NaOH, it gives yellow −2 14 3
ppt of idoform while propanol does not respond to → →
iodoform test. 2. b + c = iˆ + 3 ĵ + k̂ + iˆ + k̂ = 2 iˆ + 3 ĵ + 2 k̂
→ → →
CH 3 COCH 3 + 3NaOI → → → → ( b + c ). a
Projection of b + c on a = .
Pr opanone |a|
CH 3 I ↓ + CH 3COONa + 2 NaOH (2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ).(iˆ + 2 ˆj + kˆ) 2 + 6 + 2 10
Yellow ppt = = =
(1) 2 + (2) 2 + (1) 2 1+ 4 +1 6
2× M
30 (a) Mass of unit cell = → → → → → →
6.023 × 10 23 3. The vectors a , b , c are coplanar if a . [ b × c ] = 0
Density = 7.2 g cm–3 –4 –6 –2
α = 288 pm = 288 × 10–10 cm
–1 4 3 =0
Mass
Now density = –8 –1 λ
Volume
– 4 + (4λ + 3) + 6 (– λ + 24) – 2 (1 + 32) = 0
2× M
∴ 7.2 = –16λ – 12 – 6λ + 144 – 66 = 0
6.023 × 10 23 × (288 × 10 –10 ) 3 – 22λ + 66 = 0
7.2 × 6.023 × 10 23 × (288) 3 × 10 –30 – 22λ = –66 ⇒ λ = 3
or M=
2 4. order = 2
–1
= 51.79 g mol . Q The equation can't be expressed in polynomial
from
(b) Those compounds containing two or more ⇒ degree is not defined
halogen atoms in their molecules are known as
Interhalogen compounds. Properties : 5.
(sin 4 x + cos 4 x) (sin 2 x + cos 2 x) (sin 2 x − cos 2 x )
(i) They are covalent compounds and diamagnetic in ⇒
∫ (sin 2 x + cos 2 x) 2 − 2 sin 2 x cos 2 x
dx
nature.
(sin 4 x + cos 4 x) (1) (– cos 2 x)
(ii) They are more reactive than the constituent
halogens. It is because A – X bond is relatively
⇒ ∫ sin 4 x + cos 4 x
dx
weaker than X – X bond. sin 2 x

=– +c
(iii) They are very good oxidizing agents. 2
Their melting point and boiling point are higher than
halogens and increases with increase in the 2 3  2 4
6. A=   A′ = 3 5
difference of electronegativity. 4 5  
0 − 1
A – A′ =  
1 0 
0 − 1 ′  0 1
(A – A′)′ =   =  − 1 0
1 0   
0 − 1
⇒ (A – A′) = –  
MATHEMATICS 1 0 
⇒ (A – A′)′ = – (A – A′)
Section A ⇒ (A – A′) is skew symmetric matrix.

7. f(A) = A2 – 5A + 7 I2 3 1 3
P(A1) = , P(A2) = , P(A3) =
 3 1  3 1  3 1 1 0  10 10 5
=   . − 1 2 – 5 − 1 2 + 7. 0 1 
 − 1 2        1 1
P(E/A1) = , P(E/A2) = , P(E/A3) = 0
4 3
 8 5  15 5  7 0 
=   –   +   ∴ By Baye's Theorem
− 5 3 − 5 10 0 7  P(A1 )P (E / A 1 )
P(A1/E) =
0 0  P(A 1 ) P(E / A1 ) + P(A 2 )P( E / A 2 ) + P(A 3 ) P(E / A 3 )
=   = Null Matrix.
0 0  3 1
×
10 4 9
= =
8. Area of ∆ = 0 3 1 13
+ +0
k 2 − 2k 1 40 30
1
⇒ − k +1 2k 1 =0 → →
2
− 4 − k 6 − 2k 1 12. Here, A = 3iˆ + 2 ˆj + 9kˆ ; B = iˆ + λˆj + 3kˆ
→ →
k . [2k – 6 + 2k] – (2 – 2k) [–k + 1 + 4 + k] ⇒ a + b = (3iˆ + 2 ˆj + 9kˆ) + (iˆ + ˆj + kˆ)
+ 1 [(–k + 1) (6 – 2k) –2k (–4 – k)] = 0 = 4iˆ + (2 + λ) ˆj + 12 kˆ
k [4k – 6] – (2 – 2k) (5) + [2k2 – 8k + 6 + 8k + 2k2] = 0
→ →
4k2 – 6k – 10 + 10k + 4k2 + 6 = 0 a − b = (3iˆ + 2 ˆj + 9kˆ) − (iˆ + λˆj + 3kˆ)
8k2 + 4k – 4 = 0 = 2iˆ + (2 − λ) ˆj + 6kˆ
2
2k + k – 1 = 0 → →  → → 
(2k – 1) (k + 1) = 0 ⇒ k = 1/2, – 1
Since  a + b  ⊥  a − b  we have
   
9. y = f (ex) → →   →
⋅ →
a+ b  a− b = 0
y' = f '(ex). ex   
⇒ [4iˆ + (2 + λ) ˆj + 12kˆ] [2iˆ + (2 − λ ) ˆj + 6kˆ] = 0
y" = f ' (e x ). e x + e x . f " (e x ). e x
⇒ 4 × + (2 + λ) × (2 – λ) + 12 × 6 = 0
⇒ 8 + 4 – λ2 + 72 = 0
10. f (g(x)) = g ( x) = x 2 − 1
⇒ λ2 = 84 ⇒ λ = ±2 21
g(f (x)) = f (x)2 – 1 = ( x ) 2 − 1 = x – 1
13. Equation of plane passing through the inter sections
of planes
x + 2y + 32 – 4 = 0 and 2x + 4 – z + 5 = 0
Section B (x + 2y + 32 – 4) + λ (2x y – z + 5) = 0 …(i)
x + 2y + 32 – 4 + 2λx + λy –λz + 5λ = 0
11. A : 3 cards have the same number (1 + 2λ) x + (2 + λ) y + (3 –λ) z – 4 + 5λ = 0
 4  Since the plane (i) is perpendicular to
n(A) = 13 C(4, 3) = 13   = 13 (4) = 52

 3 1 5x + 3y + 6z + 8 = 0
52 ∴ (1 + 2λ) ⋅ 5+ (2 + λ) ⋅ 3 + ( 3 – λ) ⋅ 6 = 0
n(S) = C(52, 3) = = 22100
3 49 5 + 10λ + 6 + 3λ + 18 – 6 λ = 0
Required probability −29
7λ + 29 = 0 ⇒ λ =
n( A) 52 13 1 7
= P(A) = = = =
n( S ) 22100 5525 425 ∴ required equation of plane is
OR −29
Let E : Candidate Reaches late (x + 2y + 3z – 4) (2x + y – z + 5) = 0
7
A1 = Candidate travels by bus
7x + 14 y + 21z – 28 – 54x – 29y + 29z – 145 = 0
A2 : Candidate travels by scooter
– 47 x – 15y + 50z –173 = 0
A3 : Candidate travels by other modes of
47x + 15y – 50z + 173 = 0
transport

OR = (a + b + c) [3bc + 3ab + 3ac]
The equation of a plane passing through the = 3 (a + b + c) (ab + bc ca) hence proved.
intersection of the given planes is
(4x – y + z –10) + λ(x + y – z –4) = 0 x = 0
18. at y-axis ⇒ pt = (0, b)
⇒ x(4 + λ) + y (λ –1) + z (1 –λ) –10 – 4λ = 0 y = b 
This plane is parallel to the line with direction ratios dy b
proportional to 2, 1,1 Now = − e−x / a
dx a
∴ 2(4 + λ) + 1(λ –1) + 1(1 –λ) = 0 ⇒ λ = – 4
 dy  b
Putting λ = – 4 in (i), we obtain   =−
5y – 5z – 6 = 0  dx  0,b a
This is the equation of the required plane. b
equation of tangent y–b=– (x – 0)
Now, length of the perpendicular from (1, 1, 1) on (ii) a
is given by x
⇒ + y /b =1
5 ×1 − 5 ×1 − 6 3 2 a
d= =
2
5 + (−5) 2 5 19. centre = (h, 0) rad. = h equation is
sin( x − a + a )
14. ∫ sin( x − a)
dx
sin( x − a ) cos a + cos( x − a ) sin a (h, 0)

∫ sin( x − a )
dx
= cos a. x + sin a. ln sin (x – a) + c

(x – h)2 + (y – 0)2 = h2
15. sin x = t ⇒ x2 + y2 – 2hx = 0 … (1)
cos x dx = dt
Deff. 2x + 2y . y1 – 2h = 0 ⇒ h = x + y y' …(2)
dt
∫ t 2 − 2t − 3
From (1), (2)
dt x 2 + y 2 = 2( x + yy ' ) x
∫ (t − 1) 2 − 22 OR
Let P(x, y) be any point on the curve. The equation of
log | (t − 1) + (t − 1) 2 − 2 2 | +c replace t the normal at P (x, y) to the given curve is
1
Y–y=– (X –x) … (i)
16. take log dy / dx
m log x + n log y = (m + n) log (x + y) It is given that the normal at each point passes through
m n dy (m + n)  dy  (2, 0). Therefore, (i) also passes through (2, 0). Putting
diff. + = 1 +  Y = 0 and x = 2 in (i), we get
x y dx x + y  dx 
1
nx − my dy nx − my dy 0–y=– (2 –x)
⇒ = ⇒ = y/x dy / dx
y ( x + y ) dx ( x + y ) x dx
dy
⇒y =2–x
17. C1 → C1 + C2 + C3 dx
1 −a+b −a+c ⇒ ydy = (2 – x) dx [On integrating both sides]
(a + b + c) 1 3b −b+c y 2
(2 − x) 2
⇒ =– +C
1 −c+b 3c 2 2
R2 → R2 – R1, R3 – R1 ⇒ y2 = – (2 – x)2 + 2C … (ii)
1 −a+b −a+c This passes through (2, 3). Therefore,
(a + b + c) 1 2b + a − b + a 9
9 = 0 + 2C ⇒ C =
2
1 − c + a 2c + a
9
(a + b + c) [(2b + a) (2c + a) – (a – b) (a – c)] Putting C = in (ii), we get
2

y2 = – (2 – x)2 + 9 y = sin–1 (sin 2θ)
This is the equation of required curve. y = 2tan–1 x
dy 2
20. Q f (x) is conti. at x = 1 =
dx 1 + x 2
∴ f (1) = f (1–) z = tan–1 x
⇒ 1 = lim a (1 – h)2 – b dz 1
h→0
=
⇒1=a–b …(1) dx 1 + x 2
dy 2 / 1 + x 2
Now = =2
y 10 x − 10 − x dz 1 / 1 + x 2
21. Let =
1 10 x + 10 − x
Componendo – dividendo rule
Section C
y − 1 (10 x − 10− x ) − (10 x + 10− x )
⇒ =
y + 1 (10 x − 10− x ) + (10 x + 10− x ) 23. Let x denotes the number of spades. Clearly x can
−x take the values 0, 1, 2, or 3.
y −1 2.10
⇒ =− 13 1
y +1 2.10 x Probability of getting a spade = =
52 4
y +1
⇒ = 102x 1 3
1− y Probability of not getting a spade = 1 – =
4 4
1  y +1 3 3 3 27
⇒ x= ln10   P(x = 0) = P (No spade) = × × =
2  1− y  4 4 4 64
P(x = 1) = P (One spade and two non spade)
1  x +1
∴ f −1 ( x) = ln10   1 3 3 27
2 1− x  = 3C1 × × × =
4 4 4 64
OR P(x = 2) = P (Two spades and one non spade)
1 1 3 9
= 3C2 × × × =
1+1 4 4 4 64
f(1) = =1
2 1 1 1 1 1
1 P(x = 3) = P (Three spade) = × × =
2 4 4 4 64
2 ∴ The probability distribution of the random variable x is
f(2) = =1
2
many-one function x 0 1 2 3
If n → odd natural number then 2n –1 is also odd 27 27 9 1
P(x)
number 64 64 64 64
2n − 1 + 1
f(2n –1) = =n
2 24. The required line is to pass through
If n → even natural number then 2n is also an even →
natural number a = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj − 5kˆ and is ⊥ to the plane given by
2n →
f(2n) = =n r .(6iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ) + 2 = 0 ……(i)
2
⇒ f is onto function. →
Here the vector b = 6iˆ + 3 ˆj + 5kˆ is normal to the
plane (1)
–1  2x  ⇒ The required line is along the direction of this
22. Let y = sin  
1+ x 2  →
vector. Hence its equation is r = a + t b
→ →
put x = tan θ
→
–1  2 tan θ  ⇒ r = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj − 5kˆ + t (6iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ) ….(ii)
y = sin  2 
 1 + tan θ  Now line (2) meets the plane (1), when

[(2iˆ − 3 ˆj − 5kˆ) + t (6iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ)]⋅ (6iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ) + 2 = 0 Y
i.e. when 50
6 (2 + 6t) + 3 (3 + 3t) + 5 (5t – 5) = –2
(0, 40) 40 C
1
i.e. when t =
35
Substituting this value of t in (2), we get 30
→ 1 ˆ
r = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj − 5kˆ + (6i − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ) A (0, 20)
35 20
 50 40 
P , 
1
= (76iˆ − 108 ˆj − 170kˆ) 3 3
35 10
∴ The required point of intersection is D(25,0) B
X
O 10 20 30 40 50
 76 − 108 − 170  I
 35 , 35 , 35 
 
II
25. Let the distance covered at the speed 25 km/hour = x km The coordinates of feasible region is A (0, 20)
and the distance covered at the speed 40 km hour  50 40 
P  ,  , D (25, 0)
= y km 3 3
maximum distance z = x + y Corner points z=x+5
subject to constraints
A (0, 20) z = 0 + 20 = 20
2x + 5y ≤ 100
 50 40  50 40
x y P  ,  z= + = 30
+ ≤1 3 3 3 3
25 40
D (25, 0) z = 25 + 0 = 25
x, y ≥ 0
∴ Max. distance covered = 30 km 50/3 km at the
Table for 2x + 5y = 100 …(i)
speed of 25 km/hour and 40/3 km at the speed of
40 km/hour
x 0 50
3
y 20 0 26. Ist part : Area = ∫ 0
[(2 x − x 2 ) − (− x)] dx
x y
Table for + =1  3x 2 x 3 
3
25 40 =  − 
x 0 25  2 3 
0
y 40 0 area = 9/2
x y
Plot lines 2x + 5y = 100 and + = 1 on a graph
25 40
paper. The shaded region satisfy the given
inequalities.
(2, 0)
(0, 0)
(3, –3)
2nd part :
Both curve intersect at
(2 3 ,2), (−2 3 ,2)

(0, 4)  0 − 2 − 2  5   x  1 
−1 
X= − 4 − 1 3  2 ⇒  y  =  2
8     
(2 3 ,2) − 4 3 − 1 2  z  2
x = 1, y = 2, z = 3
(4, 0)
OR
System of equations can be written as :
2 − 1 2   x   3 
 2 4  1 1 2  .  y  =  2 
∫ ∫
2
Area = 2  6 y dy + 16 − y dy       
 0 2  2 3 − 1  z  − 2
 4
A.X=B
= 2  6 . ( y 3 / 2 ) 02 +  y 16 − y 2 + × 16 sin −1 y / 4  
2 1 1
 3 2 2  2   Ad j A 
X = A–1 . B =   .B

4 3 16π  |A| 
= +
3 3 − 7 7 0 3
1 
X= 5 − 6 − 2 .  2 
π/ 2
−7 
27. I = ∫ 0
log sin xdx …(1)  1 − 4 1  − 2
By property  x  1 
π/ 2 ⇒ X =  y  = − 1
I= ∫ 0
log cos x dx …(2)
 z   1 
x = –1, y = –1, z = 1
π/ 2  sin 2 x 
2I = ∫ 0
log
 2 
 dx
29. Let length, width → x
π/2 π/2 height → y
2I = ∫ 0
log sin 2 xdx − (log 2) ∫0
dx
volume v = x2y …(1)
π are s = x2 + 4xy …(2)
2I = I1 – log2 …(3)
2 4v
s = x2 + (from (1), (2))
Now In I1 2x = t x
dx = 1/2 dt ds 4v d 2 s 8v
= 2x – 2 , = 2+ 3 > 0
1 π 2
I1 =
2 ∫ 0
log sin t dt dx x
ds
dx x
4v
1 π/ 2 Now = 0 ⇒ 2x – 2 = 0
= .2
2 ∫ 0
log sin t dt
⇒ x = 2y
dx x
(Q v = x2y)
I1 = I
…(4)
From (3), (4), 2I = I – π/2 log 2
I = – π/2 log 2
28. System of equations can be written as :

1 1 1   x   5 
2 1 − 1 .  y  = 2
     
2 − 1 1   z  2
AX = B
 Adj (A) 
X = A–1 . B =   B
 |A| 

MOCK TEST-3 (SOLUTION)
MOCK TEST– 3 PUBLISHED IN SAME ISSUE
10. On temperature rise more valance band electrons

PHYSICS become free and more free electrons and hole pair
will be produced and conductivity of semiconductor
1. There are many atoms in an atomic hydrogen gas increases.
sample and electrons of different atoms can make
different transitions and different wavelength 11. In optical fibres refractive index of cladding is less
radiations are emitted. than core. So that electromagnetic wave traveling in
core when incidents other cladding at an angle
2. Frequency remains constant when light passes from greater than ic. Total internal reflection will occur
one medium to other. which is necessary for transmission of signals from
one place to other.
3. Those sources which have constant phase difference
are called coherent sources. These are derived from 12. Object should be placed at 2F of convex lens so as to
a single sources. form image of same size. It can't happen in case of
concave lens because it always forms a diminished
4. Kinetic energy depends on frequency of incident
image.
radiations not on intensity so kinetic energy remains
same.
13. Using d = 2Rh T + 2Rh R
5. Average power over a complete cycle of ac through
an ideal inductor (Resistance = 0) is zero. = 2R ( h T + h R )
Pav = (Irms) × (Vrms) cos φ
= 20.8 5 km = 46.5 km
R
cos φ = =0
Z 14. When a charge +Q is given to the insulated plate,
Pav = 0 then a charge –Q is induced on the nearer face of the
1A 2Ω 1Ω plate.
6. A B
+ –
V A – VB = 1 × 2 + 2 + 1 × 1 = 5 V +Q –Q
19 16
7. X–rays –→ 3 × 10 to 1 × 10 Hz
Microwave –→ 3 × 1011 to 1 × 109 Hz E
U-V rays –→ 5 × 10 to 8 × 1014 Hz
17
Radio Waves –→ 3 × 107 to 3 × 104 Hz

→ → q
8. φ = E .A , ∆φ=
ε0
φi = EA cos 180° φf = EA cos 0°
φi = – EA φf = + EA Net electric field between the plate
5
φi = – 5 × 10 V– m 5
φf = 4 × 10 V– m σ V
E= also, E =
ε0 d
q
– 5 × 105 + 4 × 105 = , q = – ε0 × 105 Cb
ε0 σd Q ε A
∴ V = Ed = = ⇒C= 0
ε0 C d
9. Intensity of radiations is 64 = 26 times the safe value.
ε 0ε r A
So after six half lines it would be safe so with dielectric. C' =
t = 6T = 6 × 2 = 12 hours. d

15. X=? E0
18. B0 =
Y = 20 Ω c
l1 = 40 cm 19. Work-function : Minimum energy needed by a free
l – l1 = 60 cm electron to remove it from metallic surface.
X Threshold frequency : Minimum frequency
B Y
required for photo-electron emission.
Threshold wavelength : Maximum wavelength of
G incident radiations required for photoelectric
A C
emission.
Stopping potential : Minimum potential required
D across the photo cell to completely stop the photo
current.
l1 l – l1
–13.6
V1 V2 20. (En) = eV, for ground state n = 1
n2
V1 ∝ l1 ∴ (E1) = – 13.6 eV
V2 ∝ (l – l1) For hydrogen like atom, (En) HLA = Z2(En) H
X Y Z 2 × 13.6
= = eV
l 1 (l – l 1 ) n2
For He+ atom, Z = 2 and n = 2
X 20 X 1 40
= or = or X= Ω  – 13.6 
40 60 40 3 3 ∴ (E2)He = 4   = – 13.6 eV
When X and Y are interchanged  4 
Y B X 5Dλ
21. = 1.5 × 10 − 2 m
d
A
G d = 0.56 × 10–3 m
C
D = 2.8 m
D
5 × 2.8 × λ
∴ −3
= 1.5 × 10 − 2
l2 l – l2 0.56 × 10
Y X 20 40 ∴ λ = 6 × 10–7 m
= ⇒ = ∴ λ = 6000 Å
l2 (l – l 2 ) l2 3 (100 – l 2 )
c
1 2 22. Source frequency ν =
= λ
l2 3 (100 – l 2 )
x x c
300 – 3l2 = 2l2 or 5l2 = 300 Band width of system = ν= ×
100 100 λ
l2 = 60 cm Number of channels N which can be transmitted
simultaneously can be found out by dividing band
λ1 λ2
width by the system with band width of one channel.
λ1λ 2 i.e.,
16. F=
2πε 0 d  xc 
d  
100 × λ  xc
N=  =
F 100λF
C1V1 + C 2 V2 R1 R 3
17. (i) Vcom = 23. =
C1 + C 2 R2 R4
1 1 24. (1) Resistance = R

(ii) Ui = C1V12 + C 2 V22 (2) Reactance are of two types
2 2
(a) Capacitive Reactance
1 2
Uf = (C1 + C2) Vcom 1
2 XC =
ωC

(b) Inductive Reactance 28. Bending of light from sharp edges is called
XL = ωL diffraction. Difference between interference and
diffraction.
(3) Impendence = Z = R 2 + (X L – X C ) 2
Interference Diffraction
(i) Two coherent sources (i) One source is
are necessary Necessary
(4)
XC XL
(ii) All fringes are of (ii) CM has double
same width width than all
other fringes
ν ν (iii) All bright fringes has (iii) as order of bright
equal intensity fringes increases,
25. Force = F = Bil intensity goes down
For current (i) (iv) For bright fringes (iv) For bright fringes,
 emf  Bvl B vl 2 2 path difference = nλ Path difference
i=  = ⇒ F= λ
 R  R R = (2n – 1) .
2
26. Cyclotron work on the fact that a positively charged
particle can be accelerated to a sufficiently high (v) For dark fringes, path (v) For dark fringes,
energy with the help of smaller values of oscillating difference = (2n – path difference
electric field by making it to cross the same electric λ = nλ
1)
field time and again with use of strong magnetic 2
field.
2λ 2 × 5000 × 10 −10
North Magnet Angular width of CM = =
a 0.5 × 10 −3
H.F B (Magnetic Field) –3
= 2 × 10 Radian
oscillator
OR
Dees D1
When white light incidents over prism then it divide
Dees D2 it into component colours. This phenomenon is
called diffraction and angle between end colours is
called angular dispersion. Prism deviates violet
target colour maximum as its refractive index for violet
colour is maximum.
South µ − µR
ω= v
µ y −1
27. 1.5318 − 1.5140
+ λ ∴ ω=
+ 1.5170 − 1
+
∴ ω = .034
+
+
+
+ r l
+
+
+ 29.
white
+
+
+
+
r q in
∫ E.ds = ∈ 0
Types of spectrum
Spectrum is of 2 types.
λ·l
E.2πrl = (i) Emission
∈0
(ii) Absorption.
λ
E=
2π ∈0 r

(i) Emission : - If radiations emitted from a substance to it, equal in magnitude and parallel but opposite in
is obtained ones screen after passing through the prism sense. No forces act on the horizontal sides as they
then spectrum is called emission spectrum. are parallel to the field .Since the field is radial, the
forces acting on the vertical parts of coil remain
It is line emission spectrum for substances at atomic
always perpendicular to the plane of the coil in all its
level in gaseous state. positions so that the perpendicular distance between
It is continuous spectrum for substances in liquid or the forces is always equal to breadth of the coil. Thus
solid state. the coil is subjected to a torque whose magnitude is
(ii) Absorption spectrum : - The substance of which given by
absorption spectrum is to be find out is placed in a τ = NiAB … (i)
transparent tube and white light is passed through it Under the action of this deflecting torque, the coil
now substance absorb radiation corresponding to some rotates on its axis. Due to elastic forces, a restoring
particular wavelength and black lines are obtained for torque τr is produced in the suspension coil, which is
these absorbed radiations. These black lines are called perpendicular to the twist θ produced in the wire.
absorption spectrum. τr = θ or τr = Cθ … (ii)
OR where C is restoring torque per unit twist, and it is
called the constant of twist for the suspension. As
Energy of emitted photons from H-atom = 10.2 eV
soon as restoring torque becomes equal to the
Work – function of metallic surface deflecting torque, equilibrium is established. The coil
12400 does not rotate further. Let φ be the angle through
= eV = 3.1 eV which the coil rotates till it reaches the equilibrium
4000
position.
Now According to Einstein's Law of Photo-electric
effect ' τ = τr or NiAB = Cφ … (iii)
E = w + K.E.max. C
i= φ = K.φ
NAB
10.2 = 3.1 + K.E.max
C
∴ K.E.max = 7.1 eV Ans K = is constant for the instrument, called
NAB
Galvanometer constant.
30. Moving Coil Galvanometer – Principle : When a
coil carrying current is placed in a magnetic field, it ∴ i∝φ.
experiences a Torque τ = NiAB sin α. This Torque Thus deflection of coil is proportional to the current
is proportional to the current passed through it.
T1 passing through it. The deflection can be measured
by using a lamp and scale arrangement.
Torsion Head OR
Consider two infinitely long thin conductors
Phosphor carrying currents in opposite directions.
Bronze Magnetic field B1 due to I1 at P on conductor CD is
given by
µ I
B1 = 0 1
Mirror 2πr
Copper coil B I1 D
Frame
Q P
N S
F1B2 B1F2
r
I2
Core A C
T2
Spring The magnetic field B1 is perpendicular to plane of
paper and directed inward. This field will produce a
Working : When a current is passed through the force/length F2 on conductor given CD by
coil, the two vertical limbs experience a force normal

µ 0 I1I 2
F2 = B1I2 = [Q F = BI l, Here l = 1] 9. (i) Sandmayer reaction. —Cl
2πr
By Fleming's left hand rule direction of F2 is away (ii) Kuchrous reaction
from conductor AB. CH ≡ CH → CH2 = CH CH3 – CHO
Similarly the current I2 will create a field B2 at Q |
directed inward which in turn will create force/length OH
F1 H+
10. (i) C 2 H 5 − N = C + 2HOH →

µ II Ethyl isocyanide Hydrolysis
F1 = B2I1 = 0 1 2
2πr C 2 H 5 NH 2 + HCOOH
By Fleming's left hand rule, the direction of F1 is Ethyl amine
away from the conductor CD. Hence the two H
conductors repel each other. H
NH ∆
Definition of Ampere If I1 = I2 = 1A, and r = 1m, (ii) + Cl–C–CH3
then Base
Acetyl chloride
µ 0 4π × 10 −7 Aniline
F= = = 2 × 10 −7 Nm −1 H O
2π 2π
Thus one ampere is that current which on flowing N–C–CH3 + HCl
through each of the two parallel uniform linear
conductors placed in free space at a distance of one
meter from each other produces between them a N-Phenylethanamide
force of 2 × 10–7 N per metre of their lengths.
11. The given reaction will be as
O
CHEMISTRY CH3CH2–C–H + CH3MgBr
H2O
CH3CH2–CH–CH3
(A) OH
1. CH3–CH2–CH=CH2 + HCl →
Br2 –H2O
CH 3 − CH 2 − CH − CH 3 CH3–CH–CH–CH3 CH3CH=CH–CH3
| H2SO4
(B)
Cl Br Br
2. (ii) > (iii) > (i) > (iv) (C)
Alc. KOH
CH3–C≡C–CH3
3. By fehling solution, tollen reagent etc. (D)
4. Amino acid are compound containing amino group O
and carboxylic group. ||
Structure of alanine is – Structural formula of A : CH 3CH 2 − C − H
+ Structural formula of B : CH3CH=CH–CH3
H3N–CH–COO– Structural formula of C : CH3–CH–CH–CH3
CH3
Br Br
5. Movement of colloidal particles towards opposite
terminal takes place which is called as Structural formula of D : CH3–C≡C–CH3
electrophoresis.
NH2
6. It is a stoichiometric defect in which an ion (cation)
get displaced from its position and get arranged as an ∆
interstitial particle it is called Frenkel defect in this 12. (i) + CH3Cl + 3 KOH
defect a vacancy or interstitial defect are formed
simultaneously. Due to Frenkel defect. Aniline Chloroform
(i) Density remains same NC
(ii) Electrical conductivity improved
+ 3 KCl + 3 H2O
7. No of particle are different in sugar and NaCl. As
dissociation in NaCl takes place. Carbylamine
8. Methyl 3-bromo 2-oxo butanoate

OH OH (ii) Trans-Esterification : An ester on reaction with
Br Br excess of alcohol in the presence of mineral acid
(ii) + Br2
H2O forms a new ester.
O
Phenol H+
Br CH3–C–OCH3 + CH3CH2OH
2,4,6-tribromophenol Methyl Ethanol
ethanoate
13. Ist Method : Given K = 2.303 O
2.303 × 0.3 2.303 × 0.3
∴ t1/2 = = = 0.3 sec. CH3–C–OCH2CH3 + CH3OH
K 2.303
Ethyl ethanoate Methanol
10 10
t90 =× t1/2 = × 0.3 = 1 sec
3 3 COCH3
II method
CH3COCl + Anhyd. AlCl3
 a0  17 (i)
2.303
K= ln  

F.C.acylation
t  a0 − x  Benzene Acetophenone
2.303 100 H H
2.303 = ln CH3MgBr
t 90 10 (ii) CH3 – C = O CH3 – C – OMgBr
Dry ether
t90 = 1 sec Ethanal
CH3
+
H /H2O
14. P = PA0 x A + PB0 x B {PºA = 450 mm
PºB = 700 mm} H
600 = 450 xA + 700 xB Cu
CH3 – C = O + H2 CH3 – C – OH
= 450 (1 – xB) + 700 xB = 450 + 250 xB 573 K
250 xB = 600 – 450 = 150 CH3 CH3
3 2 Propanone
xB = & xA =
5 5
18. (a) Cr+3, µs = 15 Fe+3 > Cr+3 > V+3
15. vapour pressure of solution pA = 0.8 pA
V+3, µs = 8
W
let mass of solute be Wg moles of solute = Fe+3, µs = 35
40
114 (b) CuSO4 (aq)
mole of octane n0 = =1
114
19. Conversions :
W / 40
xB = (i) 1-bromopropane to 2-bromopropane
W / 40 + 1 alc. KOH HBr
CH3CH2CHBr CH3CH = CH2
∆p A p ° – 0.8 p A ° W / 40 (Peroxide)
= A = xB =
pA ° pA ° W / 40 + 1 CH3CHCH3
W / 40 0.2 × 40 Br
0.2 = , W= = 10g
W / 40 + 1 0.8 O O
I2 NaOH
16. (i) Aldol condensation : Two molecules of an (ii) CH3–C–CH3 CH3–C–C.I3 CHI3
aldehyde or a ketone having at least one OH ONa OH
α-hydrogen atom, condense in the presence of a
dilute alkali to give β-hydroxy aldehyde or COONa
Na CO2
β-hydroxy ketone. (iii)
O OH 4–7 atm.
Dil. NaOH Phenol
CH3–C + HCH2CHO CH3–C–CH2CHO
H H
Ethanal Ethanal Aldol

20. DNA has a hydrogen bonded double helical 24. (i) Schottky defect : It is a stoichiometric defect in
structure. The two strands are antiparallel. It can be which pair of cations and anions get displaced from
considered a polymer of nucleotide (Base + sugar + their position in such a manner a pair of vacancies
phosphoric acid). In a nucleotide base and are created simultaneously
phosphate are linked to C1′ and C5 of sugar In this defect
molecule respectively. Two nucleotide are linked (1) Density ↓ (2) Electrical conductiriy↑
by 3 ′ – 5′ phosphodiester bonds. Hydrogen bonds
(ii) Interstials : when particles may be an additional
are formed between –
particle of same material a foreign particle get
Puric bases arranged in the spaces between regular arrangement
Adenine = Thyonine & Guanine ≡ cytosine of particles.
(iii) F-centres : when crystal of NaCl is heated in the
Pyrimidal bases vapours of Na Cl– ions get displaced from its
position and diffused into the Na vapour. And NaCl
5′ H bond 3′
P is formed which get deposited at the surface and in
S A = T S place of Cl– ion e– get arranged. This results in
P colour in the NaCl crystal. Other example LiCl in Li
P 1
C ≡ G S vapours become Pink, KCl in K vapours become
5
3′ 43 S 2 P 5′ violet.
21. (a) CH2–CH H 25. (i) Let a0 = 100 M, conc. after 10 min a0 – x
Cl = 100 – 20
CH3 2.303  a 
(b) CH2–C k= log  0 
H t  a0 – x 
OCOCH3
2.303 100
(c) CF2–CF2 = log = 0.02231 min–1
H 10 80
(ii) Let the time for 75% completion = t min
22. Antacids are drugs used to relieve acidity these can x = 75 M
act in any of the following ways – 2.303  a 
(a) neutralize acid in stomach ∴ t= log  0 
k  a0 – x 
Ex – NaHCO3, milk of magnesia
2.303 100
(b) stop acid production in stomach = log = 62.15 min
0.02231 25
Ex – oneprazole, lasoprazole
(c) antihistaminic 26. (a) Cerium (Ce),
Ex- Ranitidine (zantac) (b) Due to lanthanoide contraction.
23. Absorption at the surface is called adsorption. In (c) In basic medium, K2Cr2O7 converts into K2CrO4
adsorption the conc. of adsorbate is greater at the hence its colour changes while in acidic medium
surface than in the inner bulk. K2CrO4 converts into K2Cr2O7
Adsorption of gases :
27 (a) 4FeCr2O4+16 NaOH+ 7O 2 →
Temperature : As temperature ↑ physisorption ( air )
continuously ↓ where as with increase in
temperature chemisorption first increases than 8 Na2CrO4+2Fe2O3 + 8H2O
decreases. 2Na2CrO4 + H2SO4 →
Na2Cr2O7 + Na2SO4 + H2O
chemisorption
Physisorption
Na2Cr2O7 + 2KCl → K2Cr2O7 +2NaCl

(b) K2Cr2O7 + 7H2SO4 + 6KI →
Cr2(SO4)3 + 4K2SO4 + 3I2 + 7H2O
T T 2KMnO4+ 3H2SO4 + 5H2S →
Pressure : With increases in pressure adsorption of 2MnSO4 + K2SO4 + 8H2O + 5S
gases increases.

28. (a) Acetylene is first oxidized with 40% H2SO4 in the (b) (i) Distinction between acetaldehyde and
presence of HgSO4 benzaldehyde: Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde can be
40%, H SO distinguish by Fehling solution.
H – C ≡ C – H + H2O   
2

4 → CH3 – CHO
1% HgSO 4 Acetaldehyde give red coloured precipitate with
Fehling solution while benzaldehyde does not.
Acetylene Acetaldehyde
2+ −
Acetaldehyde is finally oxidized to acid with air in the CH 3CHO + 2Cu
1442 +4 43 
5OH →
presence of manganous acetate catalyst Fehling Solution
Manganous
CH 3CHO + [O]   → CH 3COOH CH 3 COO − + Cu 2 O+ H 2 O
Acetate red ppt .
Acetaldehyde Acetic acid
(b) (i) CH3COOH Ca

(OH ) 2
→ (CH3COO)2 Ca (ii) Distinction between Propanone and Propanol :
Calcium acetate Propanone (CH3COCH3) and propanol
(CH3CH2CH2OH) can be distinguish by iodoform
 ∆ → CH 3CHO + 2CaCO 3 test. Propanone when warmed with sodium
(HCOO) 2 Ca
Acetaldehyde hypoiodide (NaOI) i.e. I2 in NaOH, it gives yellow
ppt of idoform while propanol does not respond to
(ii) CH3COOH Ca
(OH ) 2
→ (CH3COO)2Ca iodoform test.
Acetic acid
CH 3 COCH 3 + 3NaOI →
∆
→ CH 3COCH 3 + CaCO 3 Pr opanone
Acetone
CH 3 I ↓ + CH 3COONa + 2 NaOH
(c) When heated with I2 + NaCO3 Solution, acetone Yellow ppt
gives yellow crystals of iodoform CH3COCH3 + 29. (a) Net cell reaction
3NaOI → CH3I + CH3COONa
Mg (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → 2Ag(s) + Mg+2 (aq)
Acetone Yellow ppt.
(Iodoform)
According to nernst equation
Acetic acid does not give iodoform test.
Ecell = E°cell –
0.0591
log
[ ]
Mg +2
(d) The carbonyl group in – COOH is inert and does n [ ]
Ag +
2
not show nucleophilic addition reaction like carbonyl

0.0591 0.2
compounds. It is due to resonance stabilization of = 0.80 – (– 2.37) – log
carboxylate ions. 2 (1× 10 – 3 ) 2
R– C = O R – C = O– = 3.32 V
when conc. of Mg+2 is decreased to 0.1, the new emf is
O– O
0.0591 0.1
Ecell = 3.17 – log
2 (1× 10 – 3 ) 2
Or
(a) (i) Due to smaller + I-effect of one alkyl group = 3.34 V
in aldehydes as a compared to larger +I-effect of two (b) (i) Mg > Αl > Zn > Fe > Cu
alkyl groups, the magnitude of positive charge on the As we move downwards in the electro chemical
carbonyl carbon is more in aldehydes than in ketones. series tendency to displace increases.
As a result nucleophilic addition reaction occur more (ii) K > Mg > Cr > Hg > Ag
readily in aldehyde than in ketones.
(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are 30. (i) Cl2 > Br2 > F2 > I2 (due to exceptionally small size
lower than corresponding acids and alcohols due to of F, F2 has lower bond energy than expected)
absence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding . (ii) HF < HCl < HBr < HI (according to bond length)
(iii) Aldehydes and ketones undergo a number of (iii) NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3
addition reactions as both possess the carbonyl (according to density of lonepair on central atom)
functional group which reacts a number of (iv) H2O > H2Te > H2Se > H2S
nucleophiles such as HNC, NaHSO3, alcohols, (according to strength of intermolecular bonding)
ammonia derivatives and Grignard reagents. (v) HOCl < HClO2 <HClO3 < HClO4
(according to no. of O atoms attached to Cl)

MATHEMATICS AC = ( 3 ĵ – 6 k̂ ) – ( 6 î – 7 ĵ )
= – 6 î + 10 ĵ – 6 k̂
Section A AD = ( 2 î + 5ˆj + 10 k̂ ) – ( 6 î – 7 ĵ )
= – 4 î + 12 ĵ + 10 k̂
1. y = A cos (x + B)
dy 10 – 22 – 4
= – A sin (x + B)
dx Now ∆ = – 6 10 – 6
d2y – 4 12 10
= – A cos (x + B)
dx 2 Operate R1 → R1 + R2 + R3
2 2
d y d y 0 0 0
2
=–y⇒ 2
+y=0
dx dx = – 6 10 – 6 = 0
– 4 12 10
∫ cos x / 4 + sin x / 4 + 2 sin x / 4 cos x / 4 dx
2 2
2.
⇒ The points A, B, C and D are coplanar.
∫ (cos x / 4 + sin x / 4) dx = 4 sin (x/4) – 4 cos (x/4) + c 6. Put x = a sin θ
→ →
3. a = iˆ – 2 ˆj + 3kˆ ; b = iˆ – 3kˆ ,  a sin θ 
= tan–1  
→  a cos θ 
⇒ 2 a = 2iˆ – 4 ˆj + 6kˆ
= tan–1 (tan θ) = θ
iˆ ˆj kˆ x
→ →
∴ b ×2 a = 1 0 –3 = sin–1  
a
2 –4 6
7. g (f(x)) = |5 f(x) – 2|
= – 12iˆ – 12 ˆj – 4 kˆ
| 5x – 2 |, x ≥ 0
= – 4(3iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ) = | 5 | x | – 2| = 
→ →
| –5x – 2 |, x < 0
⇒ | b × 2 a | = | – 4(3iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ) |
8. (A3×4 ⋅ B4×2 ) . C2×3
= 4 3 2 + 3 2 + 12 = 4 19 = (X)3×2 . C2×3
→ → = (Y)3×3 ∴ final order = 3 × 3
4. a = iˆ + 2 ˆj – 3kˆ , b = 3iˆ – ˆj + 2 kˆ
→ →
⇒ a + b = 4iˆ + ˆj – kˆ , 9. x + 2 = – (2 × –3) ⇒ 3x = 1 ⇒ x = 1/3
→ →
a – b = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj – 5kˆ
→ → → → 10. 2 – 20 = 2x2 – 24 ⇒ 2x2 = 6 ⇒ x=± 3
( a + b ) . ( a – b ) = ( 4iˆ + ˆj – kˆ ).( 2iˆ + 3 ˆj – 5kˆ )
= 4 × (– 2) + 1 × 3 – 1 × (– 5)
=–8+3+5=0 Section B
→ → → →
⇒ a + b is perpendicular to a – b .
11. Let A and B denote the two events respectively
5. Let the position vectors of A, B, C, D be 6 î – 7 ĵ , 5 5 6 6
P( A ) = = , P(B) = =
5+2 7 6 + 5 11
16 î – 29 ĵ – 4 k̂ , 3 ĵ – 6 k̂ and 2 î + 5ˆj + 10 k̂ 5 2 6 5
P(A) = 1 – = , P( B ) = 1 – =
respectively. Then 7 7 11 11
AB = OB – OA P(At least one of A and B happens)
= 1 – P(none of A and B happens)
= ( 16 î – 29 ĵ – 4 k̂ ) – ( 6 î – 7 ĵ ) = 1 – P (A ∩B)
= 10 î – 22 ĵ – 4 k̂ 5 5 52
=1– × =
7 11 77

OR dt
Let A → total of 8 in first throw
= ∫  5
2 2
B → total of 8 in 2nd throw   −  t + 1 
 2   2
Number of exhaustive cases when a pair of dice is  
thrown = 6 × 6 = 36  t + 1/ 2 
Cases favourable to a total of 8 in each throw are ⇒ I = sin–1   + C
(2, 6), (6, 2), (3, 5), (5, 3), (4, 4)  5/2 
Their number = 5  2t + 1 
= sin–1   + C
P(A) = P(B) = 5/36  5 
5 5 25  2x 2 + 1 
P(A and B) = P(A). P(B) = × =
36 36 1296 = sin–1  +C
 5 
dy 2x 4x 2
12. + y = 14. Divide by cos2x in Nr & Dr both
dx 1+ x2 1+ x2
4x 2 sec 2 x
Here P =
2x
1+ x2
, Q =
1+ x2
∫ (tan x – 2)(2 tan x + 1)
dx
∫
2x
dx
Let tan x = t
2
I.F. = e 1+ x 2 = e ln (1+ x )
= 1 + x2 sec2x dx = dt
4x 2 dt
Solution is : y (1 + x2) = ∫ 1+ x 2
(1 + x2) dx + c
∫ (t – 2)(2t + 1)
4x 3 1 dt
y(1+x2) =
3
+c ∫
2 ( t – 2)( t + 1 / 2)
x  (2 + x ) – 1 1 2  1 1 
13. ∫e  2 
 (2 + x ) 
dx . ∫–
2 5  t – 2 t + 1 / 2 
 dt
 1  – 1  1 ( t – 2) 
∫e +   dx log +c
x
 2  5 ( t + 1 / 2) 
 2 + x  (2 + x ) 
↓ ↓
15. Position vector of A is
f(x) f ′(x)
1 3î + ĵ + 2 k̂ ⇒ A (3, 1, 2)
= ex . +c
2+ x Position vector of B is
OR î – 2 ĵ − 4 k̂ ⇒ B(1, –2, – 4)
2x d.r.s of the line AB are 3, –1, 1 – (– 2), 2 – (– 4)
∫ 2
1 − x − (x ) 2 2
dx
i.e. 2, 3, 6
∴ Eq. of the required plane through B and
dt
Let x2 = t. Then, d(x2) = dt ⇒ 2x dx = dt ⇒ dx = perpendicular line AB is
2x
2 (x – 1) + 3 (y + 2) + 6 (z + 4) = 0
dt dt
∴I= ∫ 1− t − t 2
= ∫ 2
− {t + t − 1}
⇒ 2x + 3y + 6z + 28 = 0
→ → →
dt a = î – 3 ĵ + k̂ , b = î – ˆj + k̂ and c = 2 î – ˆj – k̂
= ∫ 1 1
16.
− {t 2 + t + − − 1} î ĵ k̂
4 4 → →
dt dt b × c = 1 – 1 1 = 2 î + 3 ĵ + k̂
⇒Ι= ∫  1  2 5 
= ∫ 5  1
2 2 –1 –1
−  t +  −  − t + 
4  2 → → →
 2  4 
∴ L.H.S = a × ( b × c )

î ĵ k̂ dy −1  − 1 
= . 2x 
= 1 – 3 1 = – 6 î + ĵ + 9 k̂ dx 2  1 − x 4 

2 3 1
dy x
=
→ → dx 1− x4
Next a . c = ( î – 3 ĵ + k̂ ).( 2 î – ˆj – k̂ )
=2+3–1=4 dy dy / dx x / 1− x4 −1
∴ = = =
→ → dz dz / dx − 2 x / 1 − x 4 2
a . c = ( î – 3ˆj + k̂ ). ( î – ĵ + k̂ )
=1+3+1=5
19 Taking log
→ → → → → →
∴ R.H.S = ( a . c ) b – ( a . b ) c y log x = x – y
x dy (1 + log x ).1 – x (1 / x )
= 4( î – ĵ + k̂ ) – 5( 2 î – ˆj – k̂ ) y= ⇒ =
1 + log x dx (1 + log x ) 2
= – 6 î + ĵ + k̂ = L.H.S. dy log x
=
dx (1 + log x ) 2
dy 3
17. = =2 (slope of line)
dx 2 3x – 2 20. Q f(π/4) = f(π/4+)
3 41 tan[π / 4 – (π / 4 + h )]
⇒ = 3x – 2 ⇒ 9/16 = 2x – 2 ⇒ x = = lim
4 48 h →0 cot 2(π / 4 + h )
y = 3/4  tan h 
 h
eqn of tangent – tan h  h 
= lim = lim = 1/2
3  41  h →0 – tan 2h h →0  tan 2h 
(y – ) = 2  x –  ⇒ 48 x – 24 y = 23   2h
4  48   2h 
21. Let y = f(x)
y y = 1 + αx
18. Let y = x ⇒ y = xy/2
y –1 x –1
y x= ∴ f–1(x) =
log y = log x α α
2 Now f(x) = f–1(x)
dy 1 1  y x –1
 – log x  = 1 + αx =
dx  y 2  2 x α
dy y2 Compose 1 = –1/α, α = 1/α
=
dx x (2 – y log x ) α=–1 , α=±1
OR
 1+ x2 − 1− x2 
Let y = tan–1   , z = cos–1 x2 α=–1
 1+ x2 + 1− x2 
 
x x x y x x
put x2 = cos 2θ
22. L.H.S = 5x 4 x x + 4 y 4x x
 1 + cos 2θ − 1 − cos 2θ  10 x 8x x + 4 8 y 8x x + 4
y = tan–1  
 1 + cos 2θ + 1 − cos 2θ 
1 1 x 1 1 x
 cos θ − sin θ  dz −1 2
=x 5 4 x + y.x 4 y 4x x
y = tan–1  cos θ + sin θ  = .2x
  dx 1− x4 10 8 x + 4 8 y 8x 4 + x
y = tan–1 [tan (π/4 –θ)]  1 1 0 
1 x 1
2 
π 1 =x  5 4 x + 5 4 0  +0
y= – cos–1 x2
4 2  10 8 x 10 8 4 


 0 1 1  The probability of drawing a white ball from the
2  7 7
= x  x 1 3 1 + 0  + 0 = x3.(7 – 6) = x3 second bag is =
 2 7 1  7 + 10 17
 
Q The probability of both these events taking place
OR 4 7 28
together is = × =
1 x yz x x2 xyz x x2 1 9 17 153
1 xyz
1 y zx = y y2 xyz = y y2 1 Hence, the required probability
xyz xyz
1 z xy z z2 xyz z z2 1 40 28 68 4
= + = = .
C1 ↔ C3 153 153 153 9
2 24.
1 x y
⇒ 1 y y2
A(1/2, 3/2 )
1 z z2
R1 → R1 – R2, R2 → R2 – R3
(0, 0) (1, 0) (2, 0)
0 x− y x2 − y2
= 0 y−z y2 − z2
1 z z2 required are
0 1 x+ y  1/ 2 1

= (x – y) (y – z) 0 1 y + z
A = 2
 ∫ 0
1 – ( x – 1) 2 dx + ∫1/ 2
1 – x 2 dx 

1 z z2
 1 1 
1/ 2
1 x+ y A = 2  ( x – 1) 1 – ( x – 1) 2 + sin –1 ( x – 1) 
= (x – y) (y – z)  2 2 0
1 y+z
= (x – y) (y – z) [(y + z) – (x + y)]
 
1
1 1 2π 3
= (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) +  x 1 – x 2 + sin –1 x   = –
2 2  1/ 2  3 2
25. Ist Part

Section C
π
ecos x
23. The ball transferred from the first bag to the second I= ∫ e cos x + e – cos x
.... (1)
bag can either be white or black. 0
Case I : When white ball is transferred from the Ist By property

bag to the second.
π
5 e – cos x
Probability of getting white ball from Ist bag =
5+4
I= ∫
0
e – cos x + e cos x
.... (2)
5
= . π π 
9
Now, second bag contains 8 white and 9 black balls. 0

∫ 0
∫
By property  f ( x ) dx = f (π – x ) dx 


The probability of drawing a white ball from the
8 8 eqn (1) + (2)
second bag = = .
8+9 17 π
ecos x + e – cos x
∴ The probability of both these events taking place
5 18 40
2I= ∫
0
e cos x
+ e – cos x
dx ⇒ I = π/2
together is = × =
9 17 153 2nd Part
Case II : When a black ball is transferred from the Ist
π/ 4 π/ 4
bag to the second probability of getting black ball dx dx
from Ist bag =
4 4
= .
I= ∫
–π / 4
2 – cos 2 x
dx + π / 4 ∫ 2 – cos 2x
–π / 4
5+4 9

I1 I2 x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
Since I1 is an odd function therefore I1 = 0 y
(1)
π/ 4
dx (0, 140)B
I = π/ 4 ∫  1 – tan 2 x  D
–π / 4 2 –  2 

 1 + tan x  (50, 40) P
x
π/ 4 O A C (2)
sec 2 x
= π/ 4 ∫
–π / 4
12 + ( 3 tan x ) 2
 350 
 3 ,0 
 
π/ 4
Draw the lines
sec 2 x
= 2π / 4 ∫1
0
2
+ ( 3 tan x ) 2
[Q f(x) is even function] 2x + y = 140
3x + 5y = 350
..... (1)
..... (2)
The shaded unbounded region is the feasible region.
dt
Let 3 tan x = t ⇒ sec2x dx = These line meet at P(50, 40)
3
Now value of c = 5x + 8y
3  350  1750 1
=
π
2 ∫
dt / 3
1+ t2
= π / 2 3 tan –1 t ( )0
3
=
π2
6 3
at C 
 3 
,0 , is
3
= 583
3
0 at P(50, 40) is 570
at B(0, 140) is 1120
26. The given lines are
→
∴ The cost is minimum at P(50, 40)
r = ( î – 2 ĵ + 3k̂ ) + t ( – î + ˆj – 2 k̂ ) This occurs when 50 kg of type & fertilizer and 40
→ kg of type B fertilizer are mixed to the meet the
and r = ( î – ˆj – k̂ ) + s ( î + 2 ĵ – 2 k̂ ) requirement.
→ →
Part 2nd
Here a1 = î – 2 ĵ + 3k̂ ; b1 = – î + ˆj – 2 k̂
→ → Let x and y represent the number of tables and chairs
a 2 = î – ˆj – k̂ ; b 2 = î + 2 ĵ – 2 k̂ respectively that the dealer sells and P be the profit
of the dealer. Then the required LPP is .
î ĵ k̂
→ → Maximize: P = 50x + 15y
∴ b1 × b 2 = – 1 1 – 2 = 2 î – 4 ĵ – 3k̂
Subject to the constraints
1 2 –2
500x + 200 y ≤ 10,000 ⇔ 5x + 2y ≤ 100
The S.D. between the gives lines x + y = 60 ....(1)
5x + 2y = 100 .... (2)
→ → → →
(b1× b 2 ).(a 1 – a 2 ) (2 î – 4 ĵ – 3k̂).( ĵ – 4 k̂) y
= =
| b1 × b 2 | | 2 î – 4 ĵ – 3k̂ | B(0, 60)
D
(0, 50)
4 + 12 8
= =
2
2 +4 +3 2 2 29 A(60, 0)
x
O C (20, 0) (1)
27. Part Ist (2)
Let x kg and y kg. of fertilizer A and B be mixed by A shaded region OCD is the feasible region.
the farmer. Then LPP is Now P = 50x + 15y
Minimize : C = 5x + 8y At O, value of P is O
subject to the constraints
At C, value of P is 50 × 20 = 1,000
10 5
x + y ≥ 7 ⇔ 2x + y ≥ 140 At D, value of P is 15 × 50 = 750
100 100
∴ Profit is maximum at C (20, 0)
6 10
x + y≥ 7 ⇔ 3x + 5y ≥ 350
100 100

y
28. x
x
∴ x → side of square
y → rad. of circle
∴ 4x + 2πy = 36 ..... (1) At a Glance
Now area A = x2 + πy2
 18 – 2x 
2 Some Important Practical Units
A = x2 + π   [From (1)]
 π  1. Par sec : It is the largest practical unit of
dA 4 distance.
= 2x – (18 – 2x)
dx π 1 par sec = 3.26 light year
2
d A 2. X-ray unit : It is the unit of length.
2
= 2 + 8/π > 0 ⇒ minm area
dx
1 X-ray unit = 10–13 m
dA
Form minm area =0
dx 3. Slug : It is the unit of mass.
36 1 slug = 14.59 kg
⇒x=
π+4
4. Chandra Shekhar limit : It is the largest
18
From (1), y = practical unit of mass.
π+4
144 1 Chandra Shekhar limit = 1.4 × Solar mass
Length of one piece = 4x =
π+4 5. Shake : It is the unit of time.
36 π
Length of other piece = 2πy = 1 Shake = 10–6 second
π+4
6. Barn : It is the unit of area.
1 1 1 1 barn = 10–28 m2
29. Let =u; = v; = w
x y z
7. Cusec : It is the unit of water flow.
Given equation can be written in form
1 cusec = 1 cubic foot per second flow
2 3 10   u   4
4 –6 5   v  = 1  8. Match No. : This unit is used to express velocity
     
 6 9 – 20   w  2 of supersonic jets.
A⋅X = B 1 match no. = velocity of sound

X = A–1 ⋅ B = 332 m/sec.
Adj(A) 9. Knot : This unit is used to express velocity of
X= . B, |A| = 1200
|A| ships in water.
 75 150 75   4 1 knot = 1.852 km/hour
 110 – 100 30  . 1 
    10. Rutherford : It is the unit of radioactivity.
 72 0 – 24  2
X= 1 rutherford (rd) = 1 × 106 disintegrations/sec
1200
600 11. Dalton : It is the unit of mass.
u  400 1 / 2
X =  v  =   = 1 / 3
  1 dalton =
1
mass of C12 = 931 MeV
240 12
 w  1 / 5
1200
= 1 a.m.u.
u = 1/2 ⇒x=2
v = 1/3 ⇒y=3 12. Curie : It is the unit of radioactivity.
w = 1/5 ⇒z=5 1 curie = 3.7 × 1010 disintegration / sec

XtraEdge Test Series
ANSWER KEY
IIT- JEE 2012 (February issue)
PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans C A A A A C C D A B
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans B A D B B A B A D
20 A → P,R,S B → P,R,S C → P,Q D → P,Q
Column
21 A → R,S B→P C→R D→S
Matching
22 A → P,Q,R,S B → P,R C → Q,R D→R
C HE M ISTR Y
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans B A A C B B C A A B
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C A D B D A C C C
20 A → P,S B→S C→Q D →RP
Column
21 A→S B→P C→Q D→R
Matching
22 A → P,Q B→P C → P,Q,R D→S
MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans B D C B B C A D C D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C D A A C B B C A
20 A→S B→Q C→P D→R
Column
21 A→S B→R C→P D→P
Matching
22 A→R B→S C→Q D→P
IIT- JEE 2013 (February issue)

PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans C D A D A B A A D C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A C B C B C C D B
20 A→R B → P,S C → P,Q D→Q
Column
21 A→Q B → P,R,S C → P,R D→S
Matching
22 A → P,Q B→Q C → R,S D→S
C HE M ISTR Y
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A D C D A C B A A C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A C C A A A B C A
20 A → Q,R B → P,Q,R,S C → P,S D → P,Q,R
Column
21 A→R B→S C→Q D→P
Matching
22 A → P,S B→P C→Q D → P,R,S
MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A B B B A B A B D D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans C D D B C A A B D
20 A→Q B→S C→R D→P
Column
21 A→R B→P C→S D→Q
Matching
22 A→R B→S C→P D→Q

Subscription Offer for Students
'XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.
C
"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.
✓ Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of IIT JEE.
✓ Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.
✓ Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills
✓ Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.
✓ Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians
✓ Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/Contests problems and Challenging Questions.
SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR “EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
“XtraEdge for IIT-JEE”
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4th Floor, CP-Tower,
Special
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005 Offer
I wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine “XtraEdge for IIT-JEE”
Half Yearly Subscription (Rs. 100/-) One Year subscription (Rs. 200/-) Two year Subscription (Rs. 400/-)
I am paying R. …………………….through
Money Order (M.O)
Bank Demand Draft of No………………………..Bank………………………………………………………..Dated C
(Note: Demand Draft should be in favour of "Career Point Infosystems Ltd" payable at Kota.)
Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Father's Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________________________________
________________________City_____________________________State__________________________
PIN_________________________________________Ph with STD Code __________________________
Class Studying in ________________E-Mail: ________________________________________________
From months: ____________________to ________________________________________________

Subscription Offer for Schools
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.
C
"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.
✓ Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of the IIT JEE.
✓ Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.
✓ Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills
✓ Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.
✓ Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians
✓ Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/ Contests problems and Challenging Questions.
FREE SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR “EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
“XtraEdge for IIT-JEE”
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
C
4th Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005
We wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine “XtraEdge for IIT-JEE”

Half Yearly Subscription One Year subscription Two year Subscription
Institution Detail:
Graduate Collage Senior Secondary School Higher Secondary School
Name of the Institute: _____________________________________________________________________________

Name of the Principal: _____________________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address: _____________________________________________________________________________
__________________City_________________________State__________________________
PIN_____________________Ph with STD Code_____________________________________
Fax_______________________________ E-Mail_____________________________________
Board/ University: _____________________________________________________________________________________
School Seal with Signature


XtraedgeFebruary 2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XtraedgeFebruary 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume - 7 Issue - 8 Worry is a misuse of imagination.

February, 2012 (Monthly Magazine)

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 FEBRUARY 2012

Much more IIT-JEE News.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 2 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 3 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 4 FEBRUARY 2012

How India can we develop science and technology

• Post graduation in applied It should be treated as a business. There should be more

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 5 FEBRUARY 2012

∴ The rate of charge of momentum of the

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 6 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 7 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 8 FEBRUARY 2012

1 1 1 7. The oxides of sodium and potassium contained in a

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 9 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 10 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 11 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 12 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 13 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 14 FEBRUARY 2012

• Astronomers have discovered over 10,000

• Have you ever seen a ring around the moon?

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 15 FEBRUARY 2012

Physics Challenging Problems

1. For the process A → B PV −3

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 16 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 17 FEBRUARY 2012

3. A spherical shell of radius R is filled with water. 4πKRθ(R – x ) dx

atmospheric temperature is below 0ºC. Water is

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 18 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 19 FEBRUARY 2012

NUCLEAR REACTOR TYPES – ARE THEY REALLY SAFE?

• Based on nuclear reaction

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 20 FEBRUARY 2012

Matter Waves, Photo-electric Effect

Matter Waves : particle duality. In certain circumstances, it

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 21 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 22 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 23 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 24 FEBRUARY 2012

Thermal Expansion, Thermodynamics

Thermal Expansion : Where ∆t is the loss or gain in time in a time interval t

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 25 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 26 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 27 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 28 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 29 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 30 FEBRUARY 2012

Inorganic CO-ORDINATION COMPOUND

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 31 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 32 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 33 FEBRUARY 2012

which gives x = [Ag(NH3)2+] = 9.6 × 10–3 M, which ( y + z)( y)

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 34 FEBRUARY 2012

n (Hg(CN ) xx +– 2 ) = 0.095 mol

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 35 FEBRUARY 2012

1. Let f (x) = sin x and 7. Prove the identity :

(i) they are all of different flavours; Hence or otherwise evaluate

(iv) they contain only 2 or 3 different flavoures ?

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 36 FEBRUARY 2012

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 37 FEBRUARY 2012

sin 13 x − sin 3 x − sin 12 x + sin 2 x 8. To prove that    + 1 <    + 1